Hyundai Tucson 2014 Owner's Manual

OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time
so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried
out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your
specific vehicle.
Please note that some models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive
(RHD). The explanations and illustrations for some operations in RHD
models are opposite of those written in this manual.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the
performance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of
the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of
regulations established by the Department of Transportation and other government agencies
in your country.
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is
possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely
affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio
manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or
special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.
F2
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you
or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the
warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment
if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
✽ NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
F3
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who
drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which
we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read
it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that service and maintenance on your vehicle be performed by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave
the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do
not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2014 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored
in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai
Motor Company.
F4
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strongly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about features, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
You will find various WARNINGS,
CAUTIONS, and NOTICES in this
manual. These were prepared to
enhance your personal safety. You
should carefully read and follow ALL
procedures and recommendations
provided in these WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in which harm, serious bodily injury or death could result if
the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your
vehicle could result if the caution is ignored.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
F5
Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Gasoline engine
Unleaded
For Europe
For the optimal vehicle performance,
we recommend you use unleaded
gasoline which has an octane rating
of RON (Research Octane Number)
95 / AKI (Anti Knock Index) 91 or
higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels.)
You may use unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of RON 91-94 / AKI
87-90 but it may result in slight performance reduction of the vehicle.
Except Europe
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an Octane
Rating of RON (Research Octane
Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
87 or higher. (Do not use methanol
blended fuels.)
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
F6
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental
to the catalytic converter and
will damage the engine control
system’s oxygen sensor and
affect emission control.
Never add any fuel system
cleaning agents to the fuel tank
other than what has been specified (We recommend that you
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for details.)
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.
Leaded (if equipped)
For some countries, your vehicle is
designed to use leaded gasoline.
When you are going to use leaded
gasoline, we recommend that you
ask an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
whether leaded gasoline in your
vehicle is available or not.
Octane Rating of leaded gasoline is
same with unleaded one.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control
system and emission control system.
Introduction
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability problems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains methanol. Discontinue
use of any gasohol product
which impairs drivability.
Other fuels
Use of MTBE
Using fuels such as
- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,
- MMT (Manganese, Mn) contained
fuel,
- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and
- Other metalic additives contained
fuels,
may cause vehicle and engine damage or cause plugging, misfiring,
poor acceleration, engine stalling,
catalyst melting, abnormal corrosion,
life cycle reduction, etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
HYUNDAI recommends avoiding
fuels containing MTBE (Methyl
Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) in
your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0%
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)
may reduce vehicle performance and
produce vapor lock or hard starting.
✽ NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the use
of these fuels may not be covered by
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any
performance problems that are
caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
F7
Introduction
Do not use methanol
Operation in foreign countries
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
unleaded gasoline which has an
octane rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Anti Knock
Index) 91 or higher (for Europe) or
Octane Rating of RON (Research
Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) 87 or higher (except Europe).
For customers who do not use good
quality gasolines including fuel additives regularly, and have problems
starting or the engine does not run
smoothly, one bottle of additives
added to the fuel tank at every
15,000km (for Europe)/ 5,000km
(except Europe). Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer along with information on how
to use them. Do not mix other additives.
F8
Diesel engine
Diesel fuel
Diesel engine must be operated only
on commercially available diesel fuel
that complies with EN 590 or comparable standard. (EN stands for
"European Norm"). Do not use
marine diesel fuel, heating oils, or
non-approved fuel additives, as this
will increase wear and cause damage to the engine and fuel system.
The use of non-approved fuels and /
or fuel additives will result in a limitation of your warranty rights.
Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is
used in your vehicle. If two types of
diesel fuel are available, use summer
or winter fuel properly according to
the following temperature conditions.
• Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type
diesel fuel.
• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type
diesel fuel.
Watch the fuel level in the tank very
carefully : If the engine stops through
fuel failure, the circuits must be completely purged to permit restarting.
Introduction
CAUTION
Do not let any gasoline or water
enter the tank. This would make
it necessary to drain it out and
to bleed the lines to avoid jamming the injection pump and
damaging the engine.
CAUTION
Diesel Fuel
It is recommended to use the
regulated automotive diesel
fuel for diesel vehicle equipped
with the DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including
high sulfur (more than 50 ppm
sulfur) and unspecified additives, it can cause the DPF system to be damaged and white
smoke can be emitted.
Biodiesel
Commercially supplied Diesel blends
of no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly known as "B7 Diesel" may be
used in your vehicle if Biodiesel
meets EN 14214 or equivalent specifications. (EN stands for "European
Norm"). The use of biofuels exceeding 7% made from rapeseed methyl
ester (RME), fatty acid methyl ester
(FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester
(VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding 7% with biodiesel will cause
increased wear or damage to the
engine and fuel system. Repair or
replacement of worn or damaged
components due to the use of non
approved fuels will not be covered by
the manufactures warranty.
CAUTION
• Never use any fuel, whether
diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise, that fails to meet the latest petroleum industry specification.
• Never use any fuel additives
or treatments that are not recommended or approved by
the vehicle manufacturer.
F9
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCESS
VEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
No special break-in period is needed.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you
may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (higher
ground clearance, track, etc.) give this
vehicle a higher center of gravity than
other types of vehicles. In other words
they are not designed for cornering at
the same speeds as conventional 2wheel drive vehicles. Avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. Again,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control, an accident or vehicle rollover. Be sure to
read the “Reducing the risk of a
rollover” driving guidelines, in section 5 of this manual.
F10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Safety features of your vehicle
2
Convenient features of your vehicle
3
Multimedia System
4
Driving your vehicle
5
What to do in an emergency
6
Maintenance
7
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Index
I
Your vehicle at a glance
1
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (I)......................................1-2
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (II).....................................1-3
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (I) .......................................1-4
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (II) ......................................1-5
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW (I) ...................1-6
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW (II) ..................1-7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT.......................................1-8
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (I)
■ Front view
1. Panorama sunroof ..................................3-35
2. Front windshield wiper blades ................7-45
3. Outside rearview mirror ..........................3-48
4. Door locks...............................................3-18
5. Head light ...............................................7-82
6. Front fog light..........................................3-92
7. Hood .......................................................3-30
8. Tires and wheels ....................................7-51
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OLM014011L
1-2
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW (II)
■ Rear view
1
2. Defroster ...............................................3-102
3. Fuel filler lid ............................................3-32
4. Towing hook............................................6-25
5. Rear combination lamp ..........................7-85
6. Rear window wiper blade .......................7-46
7. High mounted stop lamp ........................7-87
8. Rearview camera....................................5-52
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OLM014010L
1-3
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Antenna ....................................................4-2
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (I)
■ Left-Hand drive type
1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-19
2. Power window switches* ..................3-26
3. Central door lock switch* ..................3-20
4. Power window lock switch*................3-29
5. Outside rearview mirror control
switch* ..............................................3-49
6. Outside rearview mirror folding
button* ..............................................3-49
7. Fuel filler lid release lever..................3-32
8. Instrument panel illumination
control switch* ..................................3-54
9. 4WD Lock button* ............................5-31
10. DBC button* ....................................5-49
11. ESC OFF button* ............................5-43
12. Fuse box..........................................7-67
13. Steering wheel ................................3-40
14. Steering wheel tilt control* ..............3-41
15. Seat ..................................................2-4
16. Hood release lever ..........................3-30
17. Parking brake pedal* ......................5-38
18. Brake pedal ....................................5-37
19. Accelerator pedal
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-4
* : if equipped
OLMB013001N/1SAA0006
INTERIOR OVERVIEW (II)
■ Right-Hand drive type
1
2. Power window switches* ..................3-26
3. Central door lock switch* ..................3-20
4. Power window lock switch*................3-29
5. Outside rearview mirror control
switch* ..............................................3-49
6. Outside rearview mirror folding
button* ..............................................3-49
7. Fuel filler lid release lever..................3-32
8. Instrument panel illumination
control switch* ..................................3-54
9. 4WD Lock button* ............................5-31
10. DBC button* ....................................5-49
11. ESC OFF button* ............................5-43
12. Fuse box..........................................7-67
13. Steering wheel ................................3-40
14. Seat ..................................................2-4
15. Parking brake pedal* ......................5-38
16. Brake pedal ....................................5-37
17. Accelerator pedal
18. Hood release lever ..........................3-30
* : if equipped
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OEL013001R-2//1SAA0006
1-5
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Door lock/unlock button ....................3-19
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW (I)
■ Left-Hand drive type
• Type A
• Type B
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
1-6
• Type C
1. Light control/Turn signals ................3-89
2. Steering wheel audio controls* ........4-3
3. Bluetooth phone controls* ....4-47, 4-85
4. Instrument cluster ..........................3-52
5. Horn ................................................3-42
6. Driver’s front air bag........................2-54
7. Wiper/Washer..................................3-95
8. Auto cruise controls* ......................5-56
9. Engine start/stop button* ................5-10
10. Ignition switch ................................5-5
11. Digital clock and Audio/AVN* ......3-136
12. Hazard warning flasher switch......3-51
13. DBC button* ..................................5-49
14. ESC OFF button* ..........................5-43
15. Climate control system* ..3-104, 3-114
16. Seat warmer* ................................2-21
17. SD card*
18. Cigarette lighter* ........................3-133
19. AUX, USB* ..................................3-137
20. Power outlet* ..............................3-135
21. Cup holder ..................................3-134
22. Shift lever ............................5-19, 5-22
23. Console box ................................3-131
24. Passenger’s front air bag* ............2-54
25. Glove box ....................................3-131
* : if equipped
OLMB013002N
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW (II)
■ Right-Hand drive type
1
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OLMB013003R-1
1-7
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Light control/Turn signals ................3-89
2. Steering wheel audio controls* ........4-3
3. Bluetooth phone controls* ....4-47, 4-85
4. Instrument cluster ..........................3-52
5. Horn ................................................3-42
6. Driver’s front air bag........................2-54
7. Wiper/Washer..................................3-95
8. Auto cruise controls* ......................5-56
9. Engine start/stop button* ................5-10
10.Digital clock and Audio/AVN* ......3-136
11. Passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF indicator* ........................2-62
12. Hazard warning flasher switch......3-51
13. Climate control system* ..3-104, 3-114
14. Seat warmer* ................................2-21
15. AUX, USB* ..................................3-137
16. Shift lever ............................5-19, 5-22
17. Passenger’s front air bag* ............2-54
18. Glove box ....................................3-131
* : if equipped
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline Engine (NU 2.0) - MPI
1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-32
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-29
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ...............7-34
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-40
5. Fuse box ...........................................7-66
6. Negative battery terminal..................7-47
7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-47
■ Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.4L) - MPI
8. Radiator cap .....................................7-33
9. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-28
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
(if equipped)....................................7-36
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ...7-37
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1-8
OLMB073001/OLMB073094
■ Diesel Engine (R2.0)
1
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-29
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ...............7-34
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-40
5. Fuse box ...........................................7-66
6. Negative battery terminal..................7-47
7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-47
8. Radiator cap .....................................7-33
9. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-28
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
(if equipped)....................................7-36
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir ...7-37
12. Fuel filter (if equipped)....................7-39
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OLMB073066
1-9
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-32
Safety system of your vehicle
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..................2-2
Always wear your seat belt............................................2-2
Restrain all children..........................................................2-2
Air bag hazards..................................................................2-2
Driver distraction...............................................................2-2
Control your speed ...........................................................2-3
Keep your vehicle in safe condition.............................2-3
SEATS.......................................................................2-4
Safety precautions ..........................................................2-6
Front seats..........................................................................2-7
Rear seats .........................................................................2-13
Headrest ............................................................................2-16
Seat warmers ...................................................................2-21
SEAT BELTS ..........................................................2-23
Seat belt safety precautions........................................2-23
Seat belt warning light ..................................................2-24
Seat belt restraint system ...........................................2-25
Additional seat belt safety precautions ....................2-34
Care of seat belts ...........................................................2-37
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS) ....................2-38
Children always in the rear ..........................................2-38
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-39
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-41
AIR BAG
- SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM.......2-52
Where are the air bags? ...............................................2-54
How does the air bags system operate? ..................2-57
What to expect after an air bag inflates..................2-61
Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch..............2-62
Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger seat .................................................................2-64
Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision .............2-64
SRS Care............................................................................2-69
Additional safety precautions .....................................2-70
Air bag warning labels ...................................................2-71
2
Safety system of your vehicle
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
You will find many safety precautions
and recommendations throughout
this section, and throughout this manual. The safety precautions in this section are among the most important.
Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of accidents. Air bags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air bags,
ALWAYS make sure you and your
passengers wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
2-2
Restrain all children
Driver distraction
All children under age 13 should ride
in your vehicle properly restrained in
a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants
and small children should be
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint. Larger children should use
a booster seat with the lap/shoulder
belt until they can use the seat belt
properly without a booster seat.
Driver distraction presents a serious
and potentially deadly danger, especially for inexperienced drivers. Safety
should be the first concern when
behind the wheel and drivers need to
be aware of the wide array of potential
distractions, such as drowsiness,
reaching for objects, eating, personal
grooming, other passengers, and
using cellular phones, to name a few.
Drivers can become distracted when
they take their eyes and attention off
the road or their hands off the wheel
to focus on activities other than driving. To reduce your risk of distraction
and an accident:
• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices
(i.e., MP3 players, phones, navigation units, etc.) when your vehicle is
parked or safely stopped.
• ONLY use your mobile device when
allowed by laws and conditions permit safe use. NEVER text or email
while driving. Most countries have
laws prohibiting drivers from texting.
Some countries and cities also prohibit drivers from using handheld
phones.
Air bag hazards
While air bags can save lives, they
can also cause serious or fatal
injuries to occupants who sit too
close to them, or who are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the
greatest risk of being injured by an
inflating air bag. Follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.
Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical
failure can be extremely hazardous. To
reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and
condition frequently, and perform all
regularly scheduled maintenance.
2
Safety system of your vehicle
• NEVER let the use of a mobile
device distract you from driving. You
have a responsibility to your passengers and others on the road to
always drive safely, with your hands
on the wheel as well as your eyes
and attention on the road.
Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also occur
at lower speeds. Never drive faster
than is safe for current conditions,
regardless of the maximum speed
posted.
2-3
Safety system of your vehicle
SEATS
Front seats
■ Left-hand drive
(1) Forward and rearward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(Driver’s seat)
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer*
(6) Headrest
Power seat
Rear seats
(7) Seatback angle and folding
(8) Headrest
(9) Armrest
(10) Seat warmer*
Manual seat
* : if equipped
OLMB033001
2-4
Front seats
■ Right-hand drive
Power seat
Rear seats
(7) Seatback angle and folding
(8) Headrest
(9) Armrest
(10) Seat warmer*
Manual seat
* : if equipped
OLMB033001R
2-5
2
Safety system of your vehicle
(1) Forward and rearward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(Driver’s seat)
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer*
(6) Headrest
Safety system of your vehicle
Safety precautions
Air bags
Adjusting the seats so that you are sitting in a safe, comfortable position
plays an important role in driver and
passenger safety together with the
seat belts and air bags in an accident.
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. Sitting too close to an air bag
greatly increases the risk of injury in
the event the air bag inflates. It is recommended that drivers allow at least
25 cm (10 inches) between the center of the steering wheel and their
chest.
WARNING
Do not use a cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and the passenger. The passenger's hips may slide under the
lap portion of the seat belt during
an accident or a sudden stop.
Serious or fatal internal injuries
could result because the seat
belt cannot operate normally.
2-6
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following precautions:
• Adjust the driver’s seat as far
to the rear as possible while
maintaining the ability to maintain full control of the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger
seat as far to the rear as possible.
(Continue)
(Continue)
• Hold the steering wheel by the
rim with hands at the 9 o’clock
and 3 o’clock positions to minimize the risk of injuries to
your hands and arms.
• NEVER place anything or anyone between the air bag.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place feet or legs on the
dashboard to minimize the risk
of leg injuries.
Seat belts
Always fasten your seat belt before
starting any trip.
At all times, passengers should sit
upright and be properly restrained.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in appropriate child restraint
systems. Children who have outgrown
a booster seat and adults must be
restrained using the seat belts.
WARNING
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat:
• NEVER attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could respond
with unexpected movement
and may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
• Do not place anything under
the front seats. Loose objects
in the driver’s foot area could
interfere with the operation of
the foot pedals, causing an
accident.
• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position
and proper locking of the seatback.
• Do not place a cigarette lighter
on the floor or seat. When you
operate the seat, gas may exit
out of the lighter causing a fire.
(Continue)
(Continue)
• Use extreme caution when
picking small objects trapped
under the seats or between the
seat and the center console.
Your hands might be cut or
injured by the sharp edges of
the seats mechanism.
• If there are occupants in the
rear seats, be careful while
adjusting the front seat position.
WARNING
To prevent injury:
• Do not adjust your seat while
wearing your seat belt.
Moving the seat cushion forward may cause strong pressure on your abdomen.
• Do not allow your hands or
fingers to get caught in the
seat mechanisms while the
seat is moving.
2-7
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat belt:
• NEVER use one seat belt for
more than one occupant.
• Always position the seatback
upright with the lap portion of
the seat belt snug and low
across the hips.
• NEVER allow children or small
infants to ride in a passenger’s
lap.
• Do not route the seat belt
across your neck, across sharp
edges, or reroute the shoulder
strap away from your body.
• Do not allow the seat belt to
become caught or jammed.
Front seats
Safety system of your vehicle
Manual adjustment
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
WARNING
OLMB033003
OLMB033002
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment
lever and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place. Move
forward and rearward without using
the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
2-8
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to
lock.)
NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
Driver and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
2
OLMB033004
OLMB033082
Seat cushion height
(for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
• Push down the lever several times,
to lower the seat cushion.
• Pull up the lever several times, to
raise the seat cushion.
Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
To adjust the lumbar support:
1. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support or the
rear portion of the switch to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position.
2-9
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
Safety system of your vehicle
Power adjustment
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion. Before
driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so that you can easily control
the steering wheel, foot pedals and
controls on the instrument panel.
WARNING
NEVER allow children in the
vehicle unattended. The power
seats are operable when the
engine is turned off.
2-10
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the seats:
• Always stop adjusting the
seats when the seat has been
adjusted as far forward or
rearward as possible.
• Do not adjust the seats longer
than necessary when the
engine is turned off. This may
result in unnecessary battery
drain.
• Do not operate two or more
seats at the same time. This
may result in an electrical malfunction.
OLMB033005
Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
WARNING
OLMB033006
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seatback reaches the desired position.
NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a
collision or sudden stop.
Drivers and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
2-11
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Safety system of your vehicle
Seatback pocket
OLMB033007
OLMB033008
Seat cushion height
(for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
1. Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or push down to
lower the front part of the seat
cushion. Pull the rear portion of
the control switch up to raise or
push down to lower the rear part of
the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
To adjust the lumbar support:
1. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support or the
rear portion of the switch to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position.
2-12
OLMB033015
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front seatbacks.
WARNING
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure occupants.
Rear seats
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
2
• Never allow passengers to sit
OLMB033083
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Pull up the seatback lever.
2. Hold the lever and adjust the seatback to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to
lock.)
on top of the folded down
seatback while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper
seating position and no seat
belts are available for use.
This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
• Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This
could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.
OLMB033037
OLMB033038
1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in
the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion, and insert the
rear seat belt webbing in the guide
to prevent the seat belt from being
damaged.
2-13
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
Safety system of your vehicle
2. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
2-14
OLMB033021
OLMB033077
4. Pull up the seatback lever, then
fold the seat toward the front of the
vehicle.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and push
up the seatback backward. Push
the seatback firmly until it clicks
into place. Make sure the seatback
is locked in place.
When returning the rear seatbacks to
the upright position, remember to
return the rear shoulder belts to their
proper position.
WARNING
Armrest
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit
vehicle occupants in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
2
WARNING
Make sure the engine is off, the
shift lever is in P (Park, for automatic transaxle vehicle) or neutral (for manual transaxle vehicle), and the parking brake is
securely applied whenever
loading or unloading cargo.
Failure to take these steps may
allow the vehicle to move if the
shift lever is inadvertently
moved to another position.
OLMB033019
The armrest is located in the center
of the rear seat. Pull the armrest
down from the seatback to use it.
You will find cup holders on the center armrest.
2-15
Safety system of your vehicle
When returning the rear seatback from a folded to an upright
position, hold the seatback and
return it slowly. Ensure that the
seatback is completely locked
into its upright position by
pushing on the top of the seatback. In an accident or sudden
stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move forward with great force and enter
the passenger compartment,
which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING
Safety system of your vehicle
Headrest
The vehicle’s front and rear seats
have adjustable headrests. The headrests provide comfort for passengers,
but more importantly they are
designed to help protect passengers
from whiplash and other neck and
spinal injuries during an accident,
especially in a rear impact collision.
(Continued)
• Adjust the headrests so the
middle of the headrests is at
the same height as the height
of the top of the eyes (see diagram).
2-16
To prevent damage, NEVER hit
or pull on the headrests.
CAUTION
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident,
take the following precautions
when adjusting your headrests:
• Always properly adjust the
headrests for all passengers
BEFORE starting the vehicle.
• NEVER let anyone ride in a seat
with the headrest removed.
(Continued)
CAUTION
• NEVER adjust the headrest
position of the driver’s seat
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Adjust the headrest as close
to the passenger’s head as
possible. Do not use a seat
cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback.
• Make sure the headrest locks
into position after adjusting it.
When there is no occupant in
the rear seats, adjust the height
of the headrest to the lowest
position. The rear seat headrest
can reduce the visibility of the
rear area.
Front seat headrest
2
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seats are equipped with adjustable
headrests for the passengers safety
and comfort.
OLMB033012
Forward and rearward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted forward to 3 different positions by
pulling the headrest forward to the
desired detent. To adjust the headrest to it’s furthest rearwards position, pull it fully forward to the farthest
position and release it.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
2-17
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB033009
OLMB033011
Safety system of your vehicle
■ Type A
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up
(4).
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to travel in
a seat with the headrest
removed.
OLMB034303
OLF034015
■ Type B
CAUTION
If you recline the seatback
towards the front with the head
restraint and seat cushion
raised, the head restraint may
come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.
OLMB034305
Removal/Reinstall
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever or switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
2-18
■ Type A
WARNING
Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after reinstalling and adjusting it properly.
2
OLMB033010
Active headrest (if equipped)
The active headrest is designed to
move forward and upward during a
rear impact. This helps prevent the
driver's and front passenger’s heads
from moving backward which helps
minimize neck injuries.
OLMB034306
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever or switch (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate height.
WARNING
A gap between the seat and the
headrest release button may
appear when sitting on the seat
or when you push or pull the
seat. Be careful not to get your
finger, etc. caught in the gap.
2-19
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB034304
■ Type B
Safety system of your vehicle
Rear seat headrest
OLMB033016
The rear seats are equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the passenger’s safety and comfort.
OLMB033017
OLMB033018
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
Removal/Reinstall
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback.
2. Raise it as far as it can go.
3. Press the release button (1) while
pulling the headrest up (2).
To lower the headrest:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
2-20
WARNING
Always make sure the headrest
locks into position after reinstalling and adjusting it properly.
Seat warmers
Seat warmers are provided to warm
the seats during cold weather.
WARNING
The seat warmers can cause a
SERIOUS BURN, even at low
temperatures and especially if
used for long periods of time.
Passengers must be able to feel
if the seat is becoming too warm
so they can turn it off, if needed.
People who cannot detect temperature change or pain to the
skin should use extreme caution, especially the following
types of passengers:
• Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients.
• People with sensitive skin or
who burn easily.
• Fatigued individuals.
• Intoxicated individuals.
• People taking medication that
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness.
WARNING
NEVER place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat
when the seat warmer is in operation, such as a blanket or seat
cushion. This may cause the
seat warmer to overheat, causing a burn or damage to the seat.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the seat
warmers and seats:
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline to clean the
seats.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped
with seat warmers.
• Do not change the seat cover.
It may damage the seat
warmer or airventilation system.
2-21
2
Safety system of your vehicle
To reinstall the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback.
2. Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate height.
Safety system of your vehicle
Front seat warmers (if equipped)
Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
) → LOW (
)
→
OFF → HIGH (
Rear seat warmers (if equipped)
The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position.
✽ NOTICE
OLMB033014
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.
OLMB033020
While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the rear
passenger's seats.
During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
✽ NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
2-22
SEAT BELTS
This section describes how to use the
seat belts properly. It also describes
some of the things not to do when
using seat belts.
Always fasten your seat belt and
make sure all passengers have fastened their seat belts before starting
any trip. Air bags (if equipped) are
designed to supplement the seat belt
as an additional safety device, but
they are not a substitute. Most countries require all occupants of a vehicle
to wear seat belts.
Seat belts must be used by ALL
passengers whenever the vehicle is moving. Take the following
precautions when adjusting and
wearing seat belts:
• ALWAYS properly restrain
children under age 13 in the
rear seats.
• NEVER allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat. If
a child age 13 or older must be
seated in the front seat, move
the seat as far back as possible and properly restrain them
in the seat belt.
• NEVER allow an infant or child
to be carried on an occupant’s
lap.
• NEVER ride with the seatback
reclined when the vehicle is
moving.
• Do not allow children to share
a seat or seat belt.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back.
• Never wear a seat belt over
fragile objects. If there is a
sudden stop or impact, the
seat belt can damage it.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
twisted. A twisted seat belt
will not protect you properly
in an accident.
• Do not use a seat belt if the
webbing or hardware is damaged.
• Do not latch the seat belt into
the buckles of other seats.
• NEVER unfasten the seat belt
while driving. This may cause
loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle interfering with the
seat belt latch mechanism.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
(Continued)
2-23
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Seat belt safety precautions
WARNING
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
Seat belt warning light
Seat belt warning light
(for driver’s seat)
If the driver's seat belt is unfastened
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position or if it is unfastened after the
ignition switch is in the ON position,
the seat belt warning chime will
sound for approximately 6 seconds.
At this time, if the seat belt is fastened, the chime will stop at once. (if
equipped)
■ Type B
WARNING
Damaged seat belts and seat
belt assemblies will not operate
properly. Always replace:
• Frayed, contaminated, or damaged webbing.
• Damaged hardware.
• The entire seat belt assembly
after it has been worn in an
accident, even if damage to
webbing or assembly is not
apparent.
2-24
OLMB033022
■ Type A
As a reminder to the driver, the seat
belt warning light on the instrument
cluster will blink for approximately 6
seconds each time you place the
ignition switch in the ON position
regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened
after the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the seat belt warning light
will blink again for approximately 6
seconds.
As a reminder to the driver, the driver’s seat belt warning lights will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds
each time you place the ignition
switch in the ON position regardless
of belt fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position or if it is disconnected after
the ignition switch is in the ON position, the seat belt warning light will
illuminate until the belt is fastened.
Seat belt restraint system
Lap/shoulder belt
✽ NOTICE
If you are not able to smoothly pull
enough of the seat belt out from the
retractor, firmly pull the seat belt out
and release it. After release, you will
be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
OLMB033087
To fasten your seat belt:
Pull it out of the retractor and insert
the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2).
There will be an audible "click" when
the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length after the lap belt
portion is adjusted manually so that it
fits snugly around your hips. If you
lean forward in a slow, easy motion,
the belt will extend and move with
you. If there is a sudden stop or
impact, the belt will lock into position.
It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.
2-25
2
Safety system of your vehicle
If you continue to unfasten the seat
belt and you drive over 9 km/h
(6mph), the illuminated warning light
will start to blink until you drive under
6 km/h (4mph).
If you continue to unfasten the seat
belt and you drive over 20 km/h (12
mph) the seat belt warning chime will
sound for approximately 100 seconds
and the corresponding warning light
will blink.
Safety system of your vehicle
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the
four different positions for maximum
comfort and safety.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder nearest the door, not over your neck.
■ Front seat
OLMB033024
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has
locked into position.
2-26
OLMB033025
WARNING
Improperly positioned seat belts
may increase the risk of serious
injury in an accident. Take the following precautions when adjusting the seat belt:
• Position the lap portion of the
seat belt as low as possible
across your hips, not on your
waist, so that it fits snugly. This
allows your strong pelvic bones
to absorb the force of the crash,
reducing the chance of internal
injuries.
(Continued)
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's Pre-Tensioner
Seat Belts. The purpose of the pretensioner is to make sure the seat
belts fit tightly against the occupant's
body in certain frontal collisions. The
pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in crashes where the frontal collision is severe enough.
OLMB033088
To release your seat belt:
Press the release button (1) in the
locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should
automatically draw back into the
retractor. If this does not happen,
check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
2-27
2
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Position one arm under the
shoulder belt and the other over
the belt, as shown in the illustration.
• Always position the shoulder
belt anchor into locked position at the appropriate height.
• Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
OLMB033039
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal
collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter
contact against the occupant's body.
If the system senses excessive tension on the driver’s or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the load limiter inside the pretensioner will release some of the
pressure on the affected seat belt. (if
equipped)
2-28
Pre-Tensioner Seat Belts that
malfunction may not protect you
properly during an accident.
Take the following precautions:
• Always wear your seat belt
and sit properly in your seat.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
loose or twisted. A loose or
twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.
• Do not place anything near the
buckle. This may adversely
affect the buckle and cause it
to function improperly.
• Always replace your pre-tensioners after activation or an
accident.
• NEVER inspect, service, repair
or replace the pre-tensioners
yourself. This must be done by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not hit the seat belt assemblies.
WARNING
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism
fires during a collision the pretensioner becomes hot and can
burn you.
CAUTION
Body work on the front area of
the vehicle may damage the
pre-tensioner seat belt system.
Therefore, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts
may be activated in certain frontal
or side collisions or rollovers (if
equipped with rollover sensor).
• The pre-tensioners will be activated even if the seat belts are not
worn at the time of the collision.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation and
should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly after an
accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.
2-29
2
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB033040/Q
The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System
consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in
the illustration above:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
✽ NOTICE
The sensor that activates the SRS air
bag is connected with the pre–tensioner seat belts. The SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument panel
will illuminate for approximately 6
seconds after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, and then it
should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner is not working
properly, the warning light will illuminate even if the SRS air bag is not
malfunctioning. If the warning light
does not illuminate, stays illuminated
or illuminates when the vehicle is
being driven, we recommend the pretensioner seat belts and/or SRS air
bags be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
Safety system of your vehicle
Rear center seat belt
OLMB033027
3-point rear center seat belt
(if equipped)
To fasten the rear center seat belt:
1. Extract the metal tab from the hole
of the belt assembly cover and
slowly pull the metal tab out from
the retractor.
2-30
OLMB033028
OLMB033029
2. Insert the metal tab (A) into the
buckle (C). There will be an audible “click” when the tab locks into
the buckle. Make sure the belt is
not twisted.
3. Pull the metal tab (B) and insert
the metal tab (B) into the buckle
(D). There will be an audible “click”
when the tab locks into the buckle.
Make sure the belt is not twisted.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length after the lap belt
portion is adjusted manually so that it
fits snugly around your hips. If you
lean forward in a slow, easy motion,
the belt will extend and move with
you. If there is a sudden stop or
impact, the belt will lock into position.
It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.
When using the rear seat center
belt, you must lock all metal tabs
and buckles. If any metal tab or
buckle is not locked, it will
increase the chance of injury in
the event of collision.
OLMB033030
OLMB033031
To release the rear center seat
belt:
1. Press the release button on the
buckle (D) and remove the metal
tab (B) from the buckle (D).
2. Insert a key or similar rigid device
into the web release hole (C). Pull
out metal tab (A) from the buckle
and allow the webbing to retract
automatically.
CAUTION
Be sure the cargo is securely
loaded in the rear cargo area.
Not doing so may damage the
rear center seat belt in a sudden
stop or collision.
2-31
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Too high
Shorten
Correct
OLMB033096
OLMB033089
OLMB033090
3. Insert the metal tab into the hole of
the belt assembly cover.
Lap belt (2-point rear center seat
belt) (if equipped)
To fasten the rear center seat belt:
Insert the metal tab into the buckle.
There will be an audible "click" when
the tab locks into the buckle. Make
sure the belt is properly locked and
that the belt is not twisted.
The length must be adjusted manually so it fits snugly around your hip.
Fasten the belt and pull the loose
end to tighten the belt.
The belt should be placed as low as
possible on your hips, not on your
waist. If the belt is too high, it could
increase the possibility of injury in an
accident.
2-32
2
OLMB03309
OLMB033037
To release the rear center seat belt:
Press the release button (1) on the
buckle and remove the metal tab
from the buckle.
Stowing the rear seat belt
The rear seat belt buckles can be
stowed in the pocket between the
rear seatback and cushion when not
in use.
OLMB033035
Using the rear center seat belt
When using the rear center seat belt,
ALWAYS use the buckle with the
CENTER mark.
2-33
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB033093
Safety system of your vehicle
Additional seat belt safety precautions
Seat belt use during pregnancy
OLMB033038
Routing the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guides will
prevent the belts from being trapped
behind or under the seats when the
rear seats are folded down.
CAUTION
When using the seat belt, use it
after taking it out of the guides. If
you pull the seat belt when it is
stored in the guides, it may damage the guides and belt webbing.
2-34
The seat belt should always be used
during pregnancy. The best way to
protect your unborn child is to protect
yourself by always wearing the seat
belt.
Pregnant women should always wear
a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the
shoulder belt across your chest, routed between your breasts and away
from your neck. Place the lap belt
below your belly so that it fits SNUGLY
across your hips and pelvic bone,
under the rounded part of the belly.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to an unborn
child during an accident, pregnant women should NEVER
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or over the area of
the abdomen where the unborn
child is located.
Seat belt use and children
Infant and small children
Most countries have child restraint
laws which require children to travel
in approved child restraint devices,
including booster seats. The age at
which seat belts can be used instead
of child restraints differs among
countries, so you should be aware of
the specific requirements in your
country, and where you are travelling. Infant and child restraints must
be properly placed and installed in a
rear seat. For more information refer
to the “Child Restraint Systems” in
this chapter.
WARNING
Larger children
Children under age 13 and who are
too large for a booster seat must
always occupy the rear seat and use
the available lap/shoulder belts. A
seat belt should lie across the upper
thighs and be snug across the shoulder and chest to restrain the child
safely. Check belt fit periodically. A
child's squirming could put the belt
out of position. Children are afforded
the most safety in the event of an
accident when they are restrained by
a proper restraint system and/or seat
belts in the rear seat.
If a larger child over age 13 must be
seated in the front seat, the child
must be securely restrained by the
available lap/shoulder belt and the
seat should be placed in the rearmost position.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center
of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need
to be returned to an appropriate
booster seat.
2-35
2
Safety system of your vehicle
ALWAYS properly restrain infants
and small children in a child
restraint appropriate for the
child’s height and weight.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to a child and
other passengers, NEVER hold a
child in your lap or arms when
the vehicle is moving.The violent
forces created during an accident will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the interior of the vehicle.
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Safety Standards
of your country. Before buying any
child restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets
Safety Standard of your country. The
restraint must be appropriate for your
child's height and weight. Check the
label on the child restraint for this
information. Refer to “Child Restraint
Systems” in this chapter.
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
• Always make sure larger children’s seat belts are worn and
properly adjusted.
• NEVER allow the shoulder
belt to contact the child’s
neck or face.
• Do not allow more than one
child to use a single seat belt.
Seat belt use and injured people
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
Consult a physician for specific recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and/or air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
During an accident, you could be
thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
2-36
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.
WARNING
• NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
• Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
• Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.
When to replace seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
The entire seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no
damage is visible. We recommend
that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Care of seat belts
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
2-37
Safety system of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)
Children always in the rear
WARNING
Always properly restrain children in the rear seats of the
vehicle.
Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully
struck by an inflating air bag
resulting in SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH.
Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must
always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident,
sudden stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Even with air bags,
children can be seriously injured
or killed. Children too large for a
child restraint must use the seat belts
provided.
2-38
Most countries have child restraint
laws which require children to travel
in approved child restraint devices.
The laws governing the age or
height/weight restrictions at which
seat belts can be used instead of
child restraints differs among countries, so you should be aware of the
specific requirements in your country, and where you are travelling.
Child restraint systems must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Safety Standards of your country.
Child restraint systems are generally
designed to be secured in a vehicle
seat by lap belt or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a toptether anchorage and/or ISOFIX
lower anchorage in the rear seats of
the vehicle.
Child Restraint System (CRS)
always in the rear
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rear-facing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the
rear seat of the vehicle. Read and
comply with the instructions for
installation and use provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.
WARNING
An improperly secured child
restraint can increase the risk
of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH
in an accident. Always take the
following precautions when
using a child restraint system:
• NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passenger’s seat.
• Always properly secure the
child restraint to a rear seat of
the vehicle.
(Continue)
Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a CRS for your child,
always:
• Make sure the CRS has a label
certifying that it meets applicable
Safety Standards of your country.
• Select a child restraint based on
your child’s height and weight. The
required label or the instructions
for use typically provide this information.
• Select a child restraint that fits the
vehicle seating position where it
will be used.
• Read and comply with the warnings and instructions for installation
and use provided with the child
restraint system.
Child restraint system types
There are three main types of child
restraint systems: rear-facing seats,
forward-facing seats, and booster
seats. They are classified according
to the child’s age, height and weight.
Rear-facing child restraints
WARNING
NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passenger’s seat.
Placing a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH if the child restraint is
struck by an inflating air bag.
2-39
2
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
• Always properly restrain your
child in the child restraint.
• Do not use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that
“hooks” over a seatback, it
may not provide adequate
protection in an accident.
• After an accident, we recommend a HYUNDAI dealer
check the child restraint system, seat belts, ISOFIX lower
anchorages and top-tether
anchorages.
Safety system of your vehicle
Keep using restraints in the rear-facing position as long as children fit
within the height and weight limits
allowed by the child restraint’s manufacturer. It’s the best way to keep them
safe. Once your child has outgrown
the rear-facing child restraint, your
child is ready for a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness.
OLMB033041
OLMB033042
A rear-facing child restraint provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the child. The harness system holds the child in place,
and in an accident, acts to keep the
child positioned in the restraint and
reduce the stress to the fragile neck
and spinal cord.
All children under age one must
always ride in a rear-facing child
restraint. There are different types of
rear-facing child restraints: infant-only
seats can only be used rear-facing.
Convertible and 3-in-1 child restraints
typically have higher height and
weight limits for the rear-facing position, allowing you to keep your child
rear-facing for a longer period of time.
Forward-facing child restraints
A forward-facing child restraint provides restraint for the child’s body with
a harness. Keep children in a forwardfacing child restraint with a harness
until they reach the top height or
weight limit allowed by your child
restraint’s manufacturer.
Once your child outgrows the forwardfacing child restraint, your child is
ready for a booster seat.
2-40
Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
WARNING
Before installing your child
restraint always:
• Read and follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.
• Read and follow the instructions regarding child restraint
systems in this manual.
Failure to follow all warnings
and instructions could increase
the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH if an accident occurs.
WARNING
If the vehicle headrest prevents
proper installation of a child
seat (as described in the child
seat system manual), the headrest of the respective seating
position shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
After selecting a proper child
restraint and checking that the child
restraint fits properly in the rear of
this vehicle, you are ready to install
the child restraint according to the
manufacturer’s instruction. There are
three general steps in installing the
seat properly:
• Properly secure the child restraint
to the vehicle. All child restraints
must be secured to the vehicle with
the lap belt or lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the ISOFIX top-tether anchorage and/or ISOFIX lower
anchorage (if equipped).
• Make sure the child restraint is
firmly secured. After installing a
child restraint to the vehicle, push
and pull the seat forward and from
side-to-side to verify that it is
securely attached to the seat. A
child restraint secured with a seat
belt should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-toside movement can be expected.
2-41
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Booster seats
A booster seat is a restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat
belt system. A booster seat positions
the seat belt so that it fits properly
over the stronger parts of your child’s
body. Keep your children in booster
seats until they are big enough to fit in
a seat belt properly.
For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap
belt must lie snugly across the upper
thighs, not the stomach. The shoulder
belt should lie snug across the shoulder and chest and not across the neck
or face. Children under age 13 must
always ride in the rear seats and must
always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident,
sudden stop or sudden maneuver.
Safety system of your vehicle
• Secure the child in the child
restraint. Make sure the child is
properly strapped in the child
restraint according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING
A child restraint in a closed
vehicle can become very hot. To
prevent burns, check the seating surface and buckles before
placing your child in the child
restraint.
2-42
ISOFIX lower anchorage and
top-tether anchorage (ISOFIX
anchorages system) for children
(if equipped)
The ISOFIX system holds a child
restraint during driving and in an accident. This system is designed to
make installation of the child restraint
easier and reduce the possibility of
improperly installing your child
restraint. The ISOFIX system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint. The
ISOFIX system eliminates the need
to use seat belts to secure the child
restraint to the rear seats.
Lower anchors are metal bars built
into the vehicle. There are two lower
anchors for each ISOFIX seating
position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments.
To use the ISOFIX system in your
vehicle, you must have a child
restraint with ISOFIX attachments.
(An ISOFIX-seat may only be installed
if it has vehicle-specific or universal
approval in accordance with the
requirements of ECE-R 44.)
The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how
to use the child restraint with its
attachments for the ISOFIX lower
anchorages.
WARNING
ISOFIX lower anchorages have been
provided in the left and right outboard
rear seating positions. Their locations
are shown in the illustration. There
are no ISOFIX lower anchorages provided for the center rear seating position.
2
ISOFIX Lower
Anchorage Position
Indicator
ISOFIX Lower Anchorage
OLMB033050
The ISOFIX lower anchorages position indicator symbols are located on
the left and right rear seat backs to
identify the position of the ISOFIX
lower anchorages in your vehicle (see
arrows in illustration).
2-43
Safety system of your vehicle
OLM039035
Do not attempt to install a child
restraint system using ISOFIX
lower anchorages in the rear center seating position. There are no
ISOFIX lower anchorages provided for this seat. Using the outboard seat anchorages can damage the anchorages which may
break or fail in a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Safety system of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint with
the “ISOFIX Anchorages System”
OLMB033051
Both rear outboard seats are
equipped with a pair of ISOFIX lower
anchorages as well as a corresponding top-tether anchorage on the
back side of the rear seats.
(CRS with universal approval to ECER44 need to be fixed additionally with
a top-tether strap connected to the
corresponding top-tether anchorage
point on the back side of the rear
seats.)
ISOFIX lower anchorages are located between the seatback and the
seat cushion of the rear seat left and
right outboard seating positions.
2-44
To install a ISOFIX-compatible child
restraint in either of the rear outboard
seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away
from the ISOFIX lower anchorages.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchors that could prevent a
secure connection between the
child restraint and the ISOFIX lower
anchorages.
3. Place the child restraint on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the
ISOFIX lower anchorages according to the instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer.
4. Follow the child restraint instructions for properly adjusting and
tightening the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the ISOFIX
lower anchorages.
WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the ISOFIX system:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• To prevent the child from
reaching and taking hold of
unretracted seat belts, buckle
all unused rear seat belts and
retract the seat belt webbing
behind the child. Children can
be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around
their neck and the seat belt
tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single
anchorage. This could cause
the anchor or attachment to
come loose or break.
• Always have the ISOFIX system inspected by your dealer
after an accident. An accident
can damage the ISOFIX system and may not properly
secure the child restraint.
WARNING
Installing the top-tether strap
First, secure the child restraint with
the ISOFIX lower anchorages or the
seat belt. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the toptether strap be attached, attach and
tighten the top-tether strap to the
ISOFIX top-tether anchorage.
ISOFIX top-tether anchorages are
located on the back of the rear seats.
2-45
2
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB033047
Take the following precautions
when installing the top-tether
strap:
• Read and follow all installation instructions provided
with your child restraint system.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single
ISOFIX top-tether anchorage.
This could cause the anchorage or attachment to come
loose or break.
• Do not attach the top-tether
strap to anything other than
the correct ISOFIX top-tether
anchorage. It may not work
properly if attached to something else.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only
those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat
belts or harnesses or for
attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
Safety system of your vehicle
3. Check that the child restraint is
securely attached to the seat by
pushing and pulling the seat forward and from side-to-side.
OLMB033048
To install the top-tether strap:
1. Route the child restraint top-tether
strap over the child restraint seatback. Route the top-tether strap
under the headrest and between
the headrest posts, or route the
tether strap over the top of the
vehicle seatback. Make sure the
strap is not twisted.
2. Connect the top-tether strap hook
to the ISOFIX top-tether anchorage,
then tighten the top-tether strap
according to your child restraint
instructions to firmly secure the
child restraint to the seat.
2-46
Child Seat Restraint for Vehicle ISOFIX Positions – For Europe
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Mass Group
Size Class
Fixture
Front Passenger
0 : UP to 10kg
0+ : UP to 13kg
I : 9 to 18kg
F
G
E
E
D
C
D
C
B
B1
A
ISO/L1
ISO/L2
ISO/R1
ISO/R1
ISO/R2
ISO/R3
ISO/R2
ISO/R3
ISO/F2
ISO/F2X
ISO/F3
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal
category approved for use in the mass group.
IL = Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems (CRS) given
in the attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the "specific
vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in
this mass group and/or this size class.
* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the foremost
position of the passenger seat.
* ISOFIX child restraint system size classes and fixtures
-
Rear Outboard
(Passenger side)
X
X
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
Rear Center
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Carrycot
Rear Outboard
(Driver side)
X
X
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
IUF
-
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height
650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape
Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing CRS
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
2-47
Safety system of your vehicle
Recommended Child Seat Restraint Systems – For Europe
Mass Group
Group 0-1
(0-18kg)
Group 1
(9-18kg)
Name
Manufacturer
Type of Fixation
ECE-R44
Approval No.
FAIR G0/1 S
FAIR S.r.l
Rearward facing with vehicle
specific ISOFIX platform type "D"
E4 04443718
Baby Safe Plus
Britax Römer
With vehicle 3-point safety seatbelt
E1 04301146
FAIR G0/1 S
FAIR S.r.l
Britax Römer
Duo Plus
Britax Römer
CRS manufacturer information
FAIR S.r.l
Britax Römer
2-48
http://www.fairbimbofix.com
http://www.britax.com
Forward facing with vehicle
specific ISOFIX platform type "A"
Vehicle ISOFIX lower anchorage
+ Top-Tether
With vehicle 3-point safety seatbelt
E4 04443718
E1 04301133
E1 04301133
Securing a child restraint with
a lap belt or lap/shoulder belt
When not using the ISOFIX anchorages system, all child restraints must
be secured to a vehicle rear seat with
the lap belt or the lap part of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING
ALWAYS place a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
Placing a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in serious injury or death
if the child restraint is struck by
an inflating air bag.
OLMB033043
Installing a child restraint with a
lap belt
To install a child restraint system on
the center rear seats, do the following:
1.Place the child restraint system on
the center rear seat and route the
lap belt through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Be sure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted.
If your CRS manufacturer instructs or
recommends you use a ISOFIX toptether anchorage with the lap belt,
see page 2-45.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap belt out of the
restraint.
2-49
2
Safety system of your vehicle
2. Fasten the lap belt latch into the
buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
3. Adjust the lap belt for a snug hold
on the child restraint by pulling the
loose end of the belt.
4. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place.
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB033044
OLMB033045
OLMB033046
Installing a child restraint with a
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on
the rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system on
a rear seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
Be sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click” sound.
3. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
4. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat belt
is holding it firmly in place.
✽ NOTICE
When using the rear center seat belt,
you should also refer to “3-point Rear
Center Seat Belt” in this chapter.
2-50
✽ NOTICE
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emergency.
If your CRS manufacturer instructs or
recommends you use a ISOFIX toptether anchorage with the lap/shoulder belt, see page 2-45.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
.Child Seat Restraint Suitability for Seat Position using the Seat Belt - For Europe
Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your children.
When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.
0 : Up to 10 kg
(0 - 9 months)
0+ : Up to 13 kg
(0 - 2 years)
I : 9 kg to 18 kg
(9 months - 4 years)
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg
(4 - 12 years)
Seating Position
Front passenger Rear outboard
Rear center
U*
U
U
U*
U
U
U*
U
U
U*
U
U
U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
U* : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group (Seat position : foremost, Seat back : upright)
2
WARNING
We recommend that a child
restraint seat be installed in the
rear seat, even if the front passenger's air bag ON/OFF switch
is set to the OFF position. To
ensure the safety of your child,
the front passenger’s air bag
must be deactivated when it
should be necessary to install a
child restraint seat on the front
passenger seat in exceptional
circumstances.
2-51
Safety system of your vehicle
Age Group
Safety system of your vehicle
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Driver’s front air bag*
Passenger’s front air bag *
Side impact air bag *
Curtain air bag *
Front passenger’s air bag
ON/OFF switch *
* : if equipped
WARNING
• SRS and pretensioners con-
❈
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OLMB033052/OLMB033053/Q
2-52
tain explosive chemicals.
If scraping a vehicle without
removing SRS and pretensioners from a vehicle, it may
cause fire. Before scraping a
vehicle, we recommend that
you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Keep the SRS parts and
wirings away from water or
any liquid. If the SRS components are inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it
may cause fire or severe
injury.
WARNING
AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time,
everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in
a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt
when the air bag inflates.
NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front
passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant
or child causing serious or fatal injuries.
ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the
safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older
must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.
All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked
and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during
an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.
You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.
Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. It is recommended that drivers
allow at least 25 cm (10 in) between the center of the steering wheel
and the chest.
2-53
2
Safety system of your vehicle
Vehicles are equipped with a
Supplemental Air Bag System for the
driver’s seat, front passenger’s seats
and/or rear seats.
The front air bags are designed to
supplement the three-point seat
belts. For these air bags to provide
protection, the seat belts must be
worn at all times when driving.
You can be severely injured or killed
in an accident if you are not wearing
a seat belt. Air bags are designed to
supplement seat belts, but do not
replace them. Also, air bags are not
designed to deploy in every collision.
In some accidents, the seat belts are
the only restraint protecting you.
Safety system of your vehicle
Where are the air bags?
Driver’s and passenger’s front
air bags (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) and lap/shoulder belts at both
the driver and passenger seating
positions.
The SRS consists of air bags which
are located in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel pad above the glove box.
The air bags are labeled with the letters “AIR BAG” embossed on the pad
covers.
■ Driver’s front air bag
WARNING
OLMB033058
■ Passenger’s front air bag
OLMB033059
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and front passengers with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt system
alone in case of a frontal impact of
sufficient severity.
2-54
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
front air bags, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Move your seat as far back as
possible from front air bags,
while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
• Never lean against the door or
center console.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs on
the dashboard.
• Do not allow the passenger to
ride in the front seat when the
front passenger’s air bag OFF
indicator is illuminated.
(Continued)
Side impact air bags
(if equipped)
OLMB033062
The side impact air bags are
designed to deploy only during certain
side impact collisions, depending on
the crash severity, angle, speed and
point of impact.
For vehicles equipped with a rollover
sensor the side and/or curtain air bags
and pre-tensioners on both sides of
the vehicle may deploy if a rollover or
possible rollover is detected.
The side impact air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact
or rollover situations.
OLMB033063
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt alone.
2-55
2
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, and the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box. Such objects could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
Safety system of your vehicle
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
side impact air bag, take the following precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and seats.
• Hold the steering wheel at the 9
o’clock and 3 o’clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injuries
to your hands and arms.
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers. This could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness
of the system.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself.
(Continue)
2-56
(Continue)
• Do not place any objects
between the door and the
seat. They may become dangerous projectiles if the side
impact air bag inflates.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side
impact air bags.
• Do not cause impact to the
doors when the ignition
switch is in the ON position or
this may cause the side air
bags to inflate.
• If the seat or seat cover is
damaged, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Curtain air bags (if equipped)
OLMB033064
OLMB033065
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
curtain air bags, take the following precautions:
• All seat occupants must wear
seat belts at all times to help
keep occupants positioned
properly.
• Properly secure child restraints
as far away from the door as
possible.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and seats.
• Do not open or repair the side
curtain air bags.
How does the air bags system
operate?
2
OLM034302N/Q
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module*
2. Passenger's front air bag module*
3. Side impact air bag modules*
4. Curtain air bag modules*
5. Pre-tensioner seatbelt system*
6. Air bag warning light*
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)* /
Rollover sensor*
8. Front impact sensors*
9. Side impact sensors*
2-57
Safety system of your vehicle
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occupants
in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
impact.
For vehicles equipped with a rollover
sensor the side and/or curtain air
bags on both sides of the vehicle
may deploy if a rollover or possible
rollover is detected.
The curtain air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
Safety system of your vehicle
10. Passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF indicator *
11. Passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch*
*: if equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.
2-58
SRS warning light
The SRS (Supplement Restraint
System) air bag warning light on the
instrument panel displays the air bag
symbol depicted in the illustration. The
system checks the air bag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light indicates that there is a potential problem
with your air bag system, which could
include your side and/or curtain air
bags used for rollover protection (if
equipped with rollover sensor).
WARNING
If your SRS malfunctions, the
air bag may not inflate properly
during an accident increasing
the risk of serious injury or
death.
If any of the following conditions occur, your SRS is malfunctioning:
• The light does not turn on for
approximately six seconds
when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately six
seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the
engine is running.
We recommend that an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the
SRS as soon as possible if any
of these conditions occur.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehicles
or objects which your vehicle
impacts during a collision. The
determining factors are not limited
to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant. It is
virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you
will simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in serious
side collisions, vehicles equipped
with a rollover sensor, side and/or
curtain air bags will inflate if the
sensing system detects a rollover.
When a rollover is detected, curtain
air bags will remain inflated longer
to help provide protection from
ejection, especially when used in
conjunction with the seat belts. (if
equipped with a rollover sensor)
• To help provide protection, the air
bags must inflate rapidly. The
speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time
in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This
speed of inflation reduces the risk
of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary
part of air bag design.
However, the rapid air bag inflation
can also cause injuries which can
include facial abrasions, bruises
and broken bones because the
inflation speed also causes the air
bags to expand with a great deal of
force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the air
bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned
excessively close to the air bag.
2-59
2
Safety system of your vehicle
During a moderate to severe frontal
collision, sensors will detect the vehicle’s rapid deceleration. If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the control unit will inflate the front air bags, at
the time and with the force needed.
The front air bags help protect the
driver and front passenger by
responding to frontal impacts in
which seat belts alone cannot provide
adequate restraint. When needed,
the side air bags help provide protection in the event of a side impact or
rollover by supporting the side upper
body area.
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Air bags inflate in the event of a
severe frontal or side collision to
help protect the occupants from
serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate. Generally,
air bags are designed to inflate
based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two
factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/inflation signal.
Safety system of your vehicle
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. The greatest risk is sitting too
close to the air bag. An air bag needs
about 25 cm (10 in.) of space to
inflate. It is recommended that drivers allow at least 25 cm (10 in.)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest.
2-60
■ Driver’s front air bag (1)
■ Driver’s front air bag (2)
OLMB033054
OLMB033055
When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically
deploy the front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
■ Driver’s front air bag (3)
WARNING
OLMB033057
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
After a frontal or side air bag inflates,
it will deflate very quickly. Air bag
inflation will not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or
being able to steer. Curtain air bags
may remain partially inflated for
some time after they deploy.
WARNING
After an air bag inflates, take
the following precautions:
• Open your windows and
doors as soon as possible
after impact to reduce prolonged exposure to the smoke
and powder released by the
inflating air bag.
• Do not touch the air bag storage area’s internal components immediately after an air
bag has inflated. The parts
that come into contact with an
inflating air bag may be very
hot.
(Continued)
2-61
2
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB033056
■ Passenger’s front air bag
To prevent objects from becoming dangerous projectiles when
the passenger's air bag inflates:
• Do not install or place any
objects (drink holder, CD
holder, stickers, etc.) on the
front passenger's panel above
the glove box where the passenger's air bag is located.
• Do not install a container of
liquid air freshener near the
instrument cluster or on the
instrument panel surface.
What to expect after an air bag
inflates
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Always wash exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm water and mild soap.
• We recommend that an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace
the air bag immediately after
deployment. Air bags are
designed to be used only once.
2-62
Noise and smoke from inflating
air bag
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and they leave smoke
and powder in the air inside of the
vehicle. This is normal and is a result
of the ignition of the air bag inflator.
After the air bag inflates, you may
feel substantial discomfort in breathing because of the contact of your
chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. The powder may
aggravate asthma for some people. If
you experience breathing problems
after an air bag deployment, seek
medical attention immediately.
Though the smoke and powder are
nontoxic, they may cause irritation to
the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and seek
medical attention if the symptoms
persist.
Passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch (if equipped)
OLMB033060
The purpose of the switch is to disable the passenger’s front air bag in
order to transport occupants who are
at increased risk for air bag-related
injury due to age, size, or medical
condition.
✽ NOTICE
OLMB033061
To deactivate the passenger’s front
air bag:
Insert the master key or a similar
rigid device into the passenger’s
front air bag ON/OFF switch and turn
it to the OFF position. The passenger
air bag OFF indicator ( ) will illuminate and stay on until the passenger’s front air bag is reactivated.
The passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF indicator illuminates for
about 4 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
WARNING
Never allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front passenger
seat when the passenger air
bag OFF indicator is illuminated. During a collision, the air
bag will not inflate if the indicator is illuminated. Turn on the
passenger’s front air bag or
have your passenger move to
the rear seat.
WARNING
If the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch malfunctions,
the following conditions may
occur:
• The air bag warning light ( )
on the instrument panel will
illuminate.
• The passenger air bag OFF
indicator ( ) will not illuminate and the ON indicator ( )
will come on and go off after
approximately 60 seconds.
The passenger’s front air bag
will inflate in a frontal impact
even though the passenger’s
front air bag ON/OFF switch is
set to the OFF position.
• We recommend that an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect
the passenger’s front air bag
ON/OFF switch and the SRS air
bag system as soon as possible.
2-63
2
Safety system of your vehicle
To reactivate the passenger’s front
air bag:
Insert the master key or a similar
rigid device into the passenger’s
front air bag ON/OFF switch and turn
it to the ON position. The passenger
air bag ON indicator ( ) will illuminate and stay on for 60 seconds.
Safety system of your vehicle
Do not install a child restraint
on the front passenger seat
■ Type A
If your vehicle is equipped with the
passenger’s front air bag ON/OFF
switch, you can activate or deactivate
the front passenger’s air bag when
necessary. For more details, please
refer to page 2-63.
WARNING
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
OYDESA2042
■ Type B
rearward facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air
bag in front of it!
• Never put a child restraint in
the front passenger’s seat. If
the front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause serious or fatal injuries.
Why didn’t my air bag go off in
a collision? (Air bags are not
designed to inflate in every
collision.)
There are certain types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional protection. These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts. Damage to the vehicle
indicates a collision energy absorption, and is not an indicator of whether
or not an air bag should have inflated.
Air bag collision sensors
(if equipped)
WARNING
OLM034310
Never install a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. An inflating
air bag can forcefully strike a child or
restraint resulting in serious or fatal
injury.
2-64
To reduce the risk of an air bag
deploying unexpectedly and
causing serious injury or death:
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bags or sensors are
installed.
(Continue)
(Continue)
• Do not perform maintenance
on or around the air bag sensors. If the location or angle of
the sensors is altered, the air
bags may deploy when they
should not or may not deploy
when they should.
• Do not install bumper guards
or replace the bumper with a
non-genuine part. This may
adversely affect the collision
and air bag deployment performance.
• Place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF or ACC position, when the vehicle is being
towed to prevent inadvertent
air bag deployment.
• We recommend that all
repairs are conducted by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
2
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB033084/OLMB033066/OLMB033085/OLMB033067
(1) SRS control module/Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
2-65
Safety system of your vehicle
Air bag inflation conditions
OLMB033069
1VQA2084
Front air bag
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
OLMB033070
Side impact and curtain air bags
Side impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a
side impact collision.
2-66
Although the driver’s and front passenger’s air bags are designed to
inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact. Side
impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate only in side
impact collisions or rollover situations (if equipped with rollover sensor), but they may inflate in other collisions if the side impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
2
In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags
are designed not to deploy in such
cases because they may not provide
benefits beyond the protection of the
seat belts.
OLMB033069
Front air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because
occupants are moved backward by
the force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not provide
any additional benefit.
Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move in the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, front air bag
deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.
However, side impact and curtain air
bags may inflate depending on the
intensity, vehicle speed and angles
of impact.
2-67
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB033071
OLMB033072
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB033073
OLMB033074
OLMB033075
In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would
not be able to provide any additional
benefit, and thus the sensors may
not deploy any air bags.
Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle
causing it to “ride” under a vehicle
with a higher ground clearance. Air
bags may not inflate in this "underride" situation because deceleration
forces that are detected by sensors
may be significantly reduced by such
“underride” collisions.
Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because front air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
✽ NOTICE -
with rollover sensor
However, if equipped with side
impact and curtain air bags, the air
bags may inflate in a rollover, when it
is detected by the rollover sensor.
✽ NOTICE -
without rollover sensor
However, side and/or curtain air
bags may inflate when the vehicle is
rolled over by a side impact collision,
if the vehicle is equipped with side
impact air bags and curtain air bags.
2-68
SRS care
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated and the collision energy is absorbed by the vehicle structure.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death take the following precautions:
• Do not attempt to modify or
disconnect the SRS components or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure.
• Do not place objects over or
near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove
box.
• Clean the air bag pad covers
with a soft cloth moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and
proper deployment of the system.
• We recommend that inflated
air bags be replaced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
2-69
2
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB033076
The SRS is virtually maintenancefree and there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is in the
ON position, or continuously remains
on, we recommend that the system
be immediately inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
We recommend any work on the
SRS system, such as removing,
installing, repairing, or any work on
the steering wheel, the front passenger's panel, front seats and roof rails
be performed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling
of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.
Safety system of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If components of the air bag
system must be discarded, or if
the vehicle must be scrapped,
certain safety precautions
must be observed. Consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
the necessary information.
Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk of
personal injury.
2-70
Additional safety precautions
Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash or
emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or be ejected
from the vehicle.
Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
seat belt can reduce the protection
provided by the seat belt and increase
the chance of serious injury in a crash
Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring
harnesses.
Do not cause impact to the doors.
Impact to the doors when the ignition
switch is in the ON position may cause
the air bags to inflate
Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
Air bag warning labels
(if equipped)
Be sure to read all of the information
about the air bags that are installed
on your vehicle in this Owner’s
Manual.
■ Type A
2
Safety system of your vehicle
OLMB033080
■ Type B
OLMB033081
Air bag warning labels are attached
to alert the driver and passengers of
potential risks of the air bag system.
2-71
Convenient features of your vehicle
KEYS ........................................................................3-4
WINDOWS..............................................................3-26
Record your key number ................................................3-4
Key operations ...................................................................3-4
Immobilizer system............................................................3-5
Power windows................................................................3-27
Power window lock button ...........................................3-29
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY ...................................3-7
Remote keyless entry system operations...................3-7
Transmitter precautions...................................................3-9
Battery replacement.......................................................3-10
SMART KEY ..........................................................3-11
Smart key function.........................................................3-11
Smart key precautions...................................................3-12
Door lock/unlock in an emergency situation ..........3-13
HOOD .....................................................................3-30
Opening the hood ..........................................................3-30
Closing the hood .............................................................3-30
FUEL FILLER LID ..................................................3-32
Opening the fuel filler lid..............................................3-32
Closing the fuel filler lid................................................3-32
PANORAMA SUNROOF ........................................3-35
Armed stage .....................................................................3-14
Theft-alarm stage...........................................................3-16
Disarmed stage ................................................................3-16
Sunroof open warning...................................................3-35
Sliding the sunroof ........................................................3-36
Automatic reversal..........................................................3-37
Tilting the sunroof..........................................................3-37
Roller blind ........................................................................3-38
Resetting the sunroof....................................................3-39
DOOR LOCKS ........................................................3-18
STEERING WHEEL................................................3-40
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle ......3-18
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle .........3-19
With central door lock switch......................................3-20
Child-protector rear door lock....................................3-22
Electric power steering .................................................3-40
Power steering.................................................................3-41
Tilt steering.......................................................................3-41
Horn....................................................................................3-42
TAILGATE...............................................................3-23
MIRRORS ...............................................................3-43
Opening the tailgate.......................................................3-23
Closing the tailgate .........................................................3-23
Emergency tailgate safety release.............................3-24
Inside rearview mirror....................................................3-43
Outside rearview mirror ................................................3-48
Remote control ................................................................3-49
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM.....................................3-14
3
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER ............................3-51
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ......................................3-52
3
Instrument Cluster Control............................................3-54
LCD Display Control........................................................3-55
Gauges ...............................................................................3-55
Transaxle Shift Indicator...............................................3-59
LCD DISPLAY.........................................................3-60
LCD Modes........................................................................3-60
Information Mode ...........................................................3-61
User Settings Mode........................................................3-62
Warning Messages..........................................................3-64
High - beam operation .................................................3-90
Front fog light..................................................................3-92
Rear fog light ...................................................................3-93
Daytime running light.....................................................3-93
Headlight leveling device...............................................3-94
WIPERS AND WASHERS......................................3-95
Windshield wipers ...........................................................3-95
Windshield washers ........................................................3-97
Rear window wiper and washer switch.....................3-98
INTERIOR LIGHT ...................................................3-99
Overview............................................................................3-70
Trip Modes ........................................................................3-70
Trip A/B .............................................................................3-71
Fuel Economy...................................................................3-72
Interior lamp AUTO cut..................................................3-99
Map lamp...........................................................................3-99
Room lamp ......................................................................3-100
Vanity mirror lamp ........................................................3-101
Luggage room lamp......................................................3-101
Glove box lamp ..............................................................3-101
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS ...................3-74
DEFROSTER ........................................................3-102
Warning lights ..................................................................3-74
Indicator Lights ................................................................3-82
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ..........3-104
TRIP COMPUTER..................................................3-70
LIGHTING ..............................................................3-88
Battery saver function ..................................................3-88
Headlight (Headlamp) escort function.......................3-88
Lighting control ...............................................................3-89
Parking light position .....................................................3-89
Headlight position ...........................................................3-89
Rear window defroster ...............................................3-102
Heating and air conditioning......................................3-105
System operation..........................................................3-110
Climate control air filter..............................................3-112
Checking the amount of
air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant ...................................................3-113
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM.....3-114
Automatic heating and air conditioning..................3-115
Manual heating and air conditioning .......................3-116
Outside thermometer ...................................................3-120
System operation..........................................................3-122
Climate control air filter..............................................3-124
Checking the amount of
air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant ...................................................3-125
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND
DEFOGGING.........................................................3-126
Manual climate control system .................................3-126
Automatic climate control system ............................3-128
Defogging logic..............................................................3-129
CLEAN AIR...........................................................3-130
STORAGE COMPARTMENT ...............................3-131
Center console storage ...............................................3-131
Glove box .......................................................................3-131
Sunglass holder ............................................................3-132
INTERIOR FEATURES.........................................3-133
Cigarette lighter ............................................................3-133
Ashtray ............................................................................3-133
Cup holder.......................................................................3-134
Sunvisor...........................................................................3-135
Power outlet...................................................................3-135
Digital clock ....................................................................3-136
Aux, USB and iPod........................................................3-137
Floor mat anchor(s)......................................................3-137
Luggage net (holder) ...................................................3-138
Cargo security screen..................................................3-139
EXTERIOR FEATURES........................................3-141
Roof rack ........................................................................3-141
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
KEYS
Record your key number
Key operations
The key code number
is stamped on the
key
code
tag
attached to the key
set. Should you lose
your keys, we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer. Remove the key code tag and
store it in a safe place. Also, record
the code number and keep it in a
safe and handy place, but not in the
vehicle.
• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
• Used to lock and unlock the glove
box.
3-4
WARNING
We recommend that you use
parts for replacement from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. If an
aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not return to ON
after START. If this happens, the
starter will continue to operate
causing damage to the starter
motor and possible fire due to
excessive current in the wiring.
WARNING
Ignition key (Smart key)
Leaving children unattended in
a vehicle with the ignition key
(smart key) is dangerous even if
the key is not in the ignition
switch or the ENGINE START/
STOP button is in the ACC or ON
position. Children copy adults
and they could place the key in
the ignition switch or press the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
The ignition key (smart key)
would enable children to operate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or even
death. Never leave the keys in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children, when the engine is
running.
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised
of a small transponder in the key and
electronic devices inside the vehicle.
Vehicles without smart key
system
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
Whenever the engine start/stop button is changed to the ON position,
the immobilizer system checks and
verifies if the key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will
not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer system
Change the engine start/stop button
to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system
Change the engine start/stop button
to the OFF position. The immobilizer
system activates automatically.
Without a valid smart key for your
vehicle, the engine will not start.
3-5
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
With the immobilizer system, whenever you insert your ignition key into
the ignition switch and turn it to ON,
it checks and determines and verifies
if the ignition key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will
not start.
Vehicles with smart key system
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a customer unique password and
should be kept confidential. Do
not leave this number anywhere
in your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories
near the ignition switch.
The engine may not start for the
metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal from
normally transmitting.
✽ NOTICE
✽ NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfuntioin.
3-6
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, we recommend that you
consult with an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition key is an important part of
the immobilizer system. It is
designed to give years of trouble-free service, however you
should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough
handling. Immobilizer system
malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction and we
recommend that the system be
serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the immobilizer
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Type A
Type B
Lock (1)
■ Type A
3
OLMB043004
OLMB043016
• To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold automatically.
• To fold the key, fold the key manually while pressing the release button.
• To remove the mechanical key,
press and hold the release button
and remove the mechanical key.
• To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it
until a click sound is heard.
OLMB043003
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without
pressing the release button.
This may damage the key.
1. Close all doors.
2. Press the lock button.
3-7
Convenient features of your vehicle
ODMECO2028
■ Type B
Convenient features of your vehicle
3. The hazard warning light will blink
once to indicate that all doors are
locked (the engine hood and tailgate must be closed).
✽ NOTICE
The doors will not lock if any door is
opened.
3-8
Unlock (2)
Tailgate unlock (3)
1. Press the unlock button.
2. The hazard warning lights will
blink twice to indicate that all
doors are unlocked.
1. Press the tailgate unlock button
for more than 1 second.
2. The hazard warning light will blink
twice to indicate the tailgate is
unlocked.
✽ NOTICE
After unlocking all doors, the doors
will lock automatically unless a door
is opened within 30 seconds.
✽ NOTICE
• After unlocking the tailgate, the
tailgate will lock automatically
unless it is opened within 30 seconds.
• Once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock
automatically.
• The word "HOLD" is written on
the button to inform you that you
must press and hold the button.
Transmitter precautions
✽ NOTICE
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due
to exposure to water or liquids, it
will not be covered by your manufacturer vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment. If the
keyless entry system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for
compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s
vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves
to the key surface.
3-9
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
The transmitter will not work if any
of following occur:
• The ignition key is in ignition
switch.
- You exceed the operating distance limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a
radio transmitter such as a radio
station or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter, we
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the transmitter is in close proximity to your cell phone or smart
phone, the signal from the transmitter could be blocked by normal
operation of your cell phone or
smart phone. This is especially
important when the phone is active
such as making call, receiving calls,
text messaging, and/or sending/
receiving emails. Avoid placing the
transmitter and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two
devices.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Battery replacement
If you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, we recommend
that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
3. Install the rear cover.
■ Type A
OLMB043201
■ Type B
For transmitter or smart key replacement, we recommend that you see
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
reprogramming.
OLMB043202
A battery should last for several
years, but if the transmitter or smart
key is not working properly, try
replacing the battery with a new one.
3-10
CAUTION
• The transmitter or smart key
is designed to give you years
of trouble-free use, however it
can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, we recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter or smart
key to malfunction. Be sure to
use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter or smart key, don't drop
it, get it wet, or expose it to
heat or sunlight.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
Locking
Smart key function
OLMB043203
OLMB043003
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Tailgate open
With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door and tailgate and even
start the engine without inserting the
key.
The functions of the buttons on a
smart key are similar to the remote
keyless entry. Refer to the “Remote
keyless entry” in this section.
Carrying the smart key, you may lock
and unlock the vehicle doors and tailgate.
Also, you may start the engine. Refer
to the following, for more details.
✽ NOTICE
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7 m (28
in.) from the outside door handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will
not lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds if any of following
occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
- Any door or the tailgate is opened.
3-11
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button of the outside
door handle.
4. The hazard warning lights will
blink once (the engine hood and
tailgate must be closed).
5. Make sure that doors are locked
by pulling the outside door handle.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Unlocking
Tailgate unlocking
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the button of the front outside door handle.
3. All doors will unlock and the hazard warning lights will blink twice.
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the tailgate handle switch.
3. The tailgate will unlock.
✽ NOTICE
• Once the tailgate is opened and
then closed, the tailgate will lock
automatically.
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7 m (28
in.) from the tailgate handle.
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 0.7 m (28
in.) from the outside door handle.
• When the smart key is recognized
in the area of 0.7 m (28 in.) from
the front outside door handle, other
people can also open the doors.
• After unlocking all doors, the
doors will lock automatically
unless a door is opened.
3-12
✽ NOTICE
Smart key precautions
✽ NOTICE
• If, for some reason, you happen to
lose your smart key, you will not
be able to start the engine. Tow the
vehicle, if necessary, and we recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, we recommend
that you take the vehicle and key to
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
to protect it from potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any
of the following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two-way radio system or a cellular
phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION
Door lock/unlock in an emergency situation
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative
due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by
your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
3
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves
to the key surface.
OLMB043004
If the smart key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
doors by using the mechanical key.
1. Press and hold the release button
(1) and remove the mechanical key
(2).
2. Insert the key into the hole of the
outside door handle. Turn the key
toward the rear of the vehicle to
unlock and toward the front of the
vehicle to lock.
3. To reinstall the mechanical key,
put the key into the hole and push
it until a click sound is heard.
3-13
Convenient features of your vehicle
(Continued)
When the smart key does not work
properly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you
have a problem with the smart key,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the smart key is in close proximity to your cell phone or smart
phone, the signal from the smart key
could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart
phone. This is especially important
when the phone is active such as
making call, receiving calls, text
messaging, and/or sending/ receiving emails. Avoid placing the smart
key and your cell phone or smart
phone in the same pants or jacket
pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two devices.
Convenient features of your vehicle
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed stage
Using the smart key
Armed
stage
Disarmed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
OJC040170
Vehicles equipped with a theft alarm
system will have a label attached to
the vehicle with the following words:
1. WARNING
2. SECURITY SYSTEM
3-14
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry
into the vehicle. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the
system provides an audible alarm with
blinking of the hazard warning lights.
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Make sure that all doors, the
engine hood and tailgate/trunk are
closed and latched.
3. • Lock the doors by pressing the
button of the front outside door
handle with the smart key in your
possession.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will operate once to indicate that
the system is armed.
If the tailgate/trunk or engine
hood remains opened, the hazard warning lights will not operate
and theft-alarm will not arm. After
this, if the tailgate/ trunk and
engine hood are closed, the hazard warning lights will blink once.
Using the transmitter
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Turn off the engine and remove the
ignition key from the ignition switch.
2. Make sure that all doors, the
engine hood and tailgate/trunk are
closed and latched.
3. Lock the doors by pressing the
lock button on the transmitter.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door, tailgate/trunk or engine
hood remains opened, the hazard
warning lights will not operate and
theft-alarm will not arm. After this,
if all doors, tailgate/trunk and
engine hood are closed, the hazard warning lights will blink once.
• Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehicle.
If the system is armed while a
passenger(s) remains in the vehicle, the alarm may be activated
when the remaining passenger(s)
leave the vehicle. If any door, tailgate/trunk lid or engine hood is
opened within 30 seconds after
entering the armed stage, the
system is disarmed to prevent
unnecessary alarm.
3-15
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
• Lock the doors by pressing the
lock button on the smart key.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will operate once to indicate that
the system is armed.
If any door, tailgate/trunk or engine
hood remains open, the hazard
warning lights won't operate and
theft-alarm will not arm. After this,
if all doors, tailgate/trunk and
engine hood are closed, the hazard warning lights will blink once.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Theft-alarm stage
Disarmed stage
The alarm will be activated if any of
the following occurs while the system
is armed.
• A front or rear door is opened without using transmitter or smart key.
• The tailgate/trunk is opened without using transmitter or smart key.
• The engine hood is opened.
The siren will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously
for 27 seconds, unless the system is
disarmed. To turn off the system,
unlock the doors with the transmitter
or smart key.
The system will be disarmed when:
3-16
Transmitter
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The engine is started.
- The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position for 30 seconds or more.
Smart key
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door
is pressed while carrying the smart
key.
- The engine is started.
- The engine start/stop button is
turned to the ON position.
After the doors are unlocked, the hazard warning lights will blink twice to
indicate that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if any
door (or tailgate/trunk) is not opened
within 30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.
✽ NOTICE
• Without smart key system
If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key into
the ignition switch and start the
engine. Then the system will be
disarmed.
• With smart key system
If the system is not disarmed with
the smart key, open the door with
the mechanical key and start the
engine. Then the system will be
disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, we recommend that you consult with your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the theft-alarm system because
it could cause the theft-alarm
system to malfunction and we
recommend that the system be
serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the theft-alarm
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
3-17
Convenient features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
Mechanical key
■ Type A
Unlock
Lock
OLMB043006
■ Type B
Lock
Unlock
OLMB043204
3-18
• Turn the key toward rear of vehicle
to unlock and toward front of vehicle to lock.
• If you lock/unlock the door with a
key, all vehicle doors will lock/
unlock automatically. (if equipped)
• Once the door is unlocked, it may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
Transmitter/Smart key
• Doors can be locked and unlocked
with the transmitter or smart key.
• Doors can be locked and unlocked
pressing the button of the outside
door handle with the smart key in
your possession. (vehicles equipped
with smart key system)
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
✽ NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
WARNING
• If you don't close the door
securely, the door may open
again.
• Be careful that someone's
body and hands are not
trapped when closing the door.
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
Unlock
OLMB043205
• To lock a door without the key,
push the inside door lock button (1)
or central door lock switch (2) to
the “Lock” position and close the
door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch, all vehicle doors
will lock automatically.
• Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
OLMB043206
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.
3-19
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Lock
• If the inner door handle of the driver’s (or front passenger’s) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button will
unlock and the door will open. (if
equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch
and any front door is opened.
• Doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is opened.
Convenient features of your vehicle
With central door lock switch
Driver’s door
• However, if the smart key is in the
vehicle and any door is open, the
doors will not lock even though the
front portion (1) of central door lock
switch is pressed.
✽ NOTICE
Once the doors are locked with the
transmitter or smart key, the doors
cannot be unlocked with the central
door lock/unlock switch.
OLMB043207
Operate by depressing the central
door lock switch.
• When pushing down on the front
portion (1) of the switch, all vehicle
doors will lock.
• When pushing down on the rear
portion (2) of the switch, all vehicle
doors will unlock.
• However, if the key is in the ignition
switch and any front door is open,
the doors will not lock even though
the front portion (1) of central door
lock switch is pressed.
3-20
WARNING
Doors
• The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the
door. Locked doors will also
discourage potential intruders
when the vehicle stops or
slows down.
• Be careful when opening
doors and watch for vehicles,
motorcycles, bicycles or
pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
Opening a door when something is approaching can
cause damage or injury.
WARNING
WARNING
Unattended children
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
can invite theft or possible harm
to you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle while you
are gone. Always remove the
ignition key, engage the parking
brake, close all windows and
lock all doors when leaving
your vehicle unattended.
An enclosed vehicle can
become extremely hot, causing
death or severe injury to unattended children or animals who
cannot escape the vehicle.
Furthermore, children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm,
possibly from someone gaining
entry to the vehicle. Never leave
children or animals unattended
in your vehicle.
All doors will automatically lock after
the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h.
You can activate or deactivate the
auto door lock/unlock features in the
vehicle. Refer to "User setting" in this
section.
3-21
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Unlocked vehicles
Speed sensing door lock
system (if equipped)
Convenient features of your vehicle
Child-protector rear door lock
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside door handle.
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle (1)
until rear door child safety lock is
unlocked.
WARNING
Rear door locks
OLMB043208
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located
on the rear edge of the door to the
“Lock” position. When the child
safety lock is in the “Lock ( )”
position, rear door will not open
even though the inner door handle
is pulled inside the vehicle.
3-22
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out
and be severely injured or
killed. To prevent children from
opening the rear doors from the
inside, the rear door safety
locks should be used whenever
children are in the vehicle.
TAILGATE
✽ NOTICE
Opening the tailgate
Closing the tailgate
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
WARNING
3
OLMB043209
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or
unlocked with the key, transmitter
(or smart key) or central door lock
switch.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be
opened by pressing the handle and
pulling it up.
• When all doors are lock if the tailgate unlock button on the smart key
is pressed for more than 1 second,
the tailgate is unlocked. Once the
tailgate is opened and then closed,
the tailgate is locked automatically.
OLMB043210
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the
tailgate before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur
to the tailgate lift cylinders and
attaching hardware if the tailgate
is not closed prior to driving.
Lower and push down the tailgate
firmly. Make sure that the tailgate is
securely latched.
WARNING
Make sure your hands, feet and
other parts of your body are
safely out of the way before
closing the tailgate.
3-23
Convenient features of your vehicle
The tailgate swings upward.
Make sure no objects or people
are near the rear of the vehicle
when opening the tailgate.
Convenient features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Make sure nothing is near the
tailgate latch and striker while
closing the tailgate. It may damage the tailgate's latch.
WARNING
WARNING
Emergency tailgate safety
release
Rear cargo area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints are available. To avoid
injury in the event of an accident
or sudden stops, occupants
should always be properly
restrained.
Exhaust fumes
If you drive with the tailgate
opened, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury
or death to vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate opened, keep the air vents
and all windows open so that
additional outside air comes
into the vehicle.
3-24
OLMB043211
Your vehicle is equipped with the
emergency tailgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the
tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment. The tailgate can be opened by
doing as follows:
1. Remove the cover.
2. Push the release lever to the right.
3. Push up the tailgate.
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully
aware of the location of the
emergency tailgate safety
release lever in the vehicle
and how to open the tailgate if
you are accidentally locked in
the luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time.
The luggage compartment is a
very dangerous location in the
event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use with
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
3-25
Convenient features of your vehicle
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up*/down*
(7) Power window lock switch
*: if equipped
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
OLMB043007
3-26
✽ NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate. Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door’s window. The driver’s door has a master
power window switch that controls all
the windows in the vehicle. Also, the
driver has a power window lock
switch which can block the operation
of rear passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated
for approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to the
ACC or LOCK position. However, if the
front doors are opened, the power
windows cannot be operated even
within the 30 seconds period.
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open position), your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch.
If you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
Window opening and closing
3
OLMB043212
Type A
Auto down window (if equipped)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is
in operation, pull up the switch
momentarily to the opposite direction
of the window movement.
3-27
Convenient features of your vehicle
Power windows
Convenient features of your vehicle
And if the power window switch is
pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window reversal will not operate.
✽ NOTICE
OLMB043213
Type B
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press down and release the switch.
3-28
OLMB043214
Automatic reversal (For driver’s side)
If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.)
to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.).
The automatic reverse feature is
only active when the “auto up” feature is used by fully pulling up the
switch. The automatic reverse feature will not operate if the window is
raised using the halfway position on
the power window switch.
WARNING
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
If an object less than 4 mm
(0.16 in.) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
Power window lock button
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the front and
rear passengers' doors by pressing
the power window lock switch to lock
position (pressed).
When the power window lock switch
is pressed, the driver's master control cannot operate the front and rear
passengers' power windows.
• To prevent possible damage to
Windows
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity
of the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions
at the same time. If this is
done, the window will stop and
cannot be opened or closed.
• NEVER leave the keys in your
•
•
•
•
vehicle with unsupervised
children, when the engine is
running.
NEVER leave any child unattended in the vehicle. Even
very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to
move, entangle themselves in
the windows, or otherwise
injure themselves or others.
Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head
and other obstructions are
safely out of the way before
closing a window.
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock switch in the LOCK position (pressed). Serious injury
can result from unintentional
window operation by the child.
Do not extend face or arms outside the window while driving.
3-29
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043215
WARNING
CAUTION
Convenient features of your vehicle
HOOD
Opening the hood
Closing the hood
OLMB043217
OLMB043216
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, pull the secondary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off
the engine on a flat surface,
shifting the shift lever to the
P(Park) position for automatic
transaxle and to the 1(First)
gear or R(Reverse) for manual
transaxle, and setting the parking brake.
3-30
OLMB043218
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compartment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be
removed from the engine compartment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
it down. Make sure the hood is
locked securely
WARNING
WARNING
• Always double check to be
• Before closing the hood,
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If it
is not latched, the hood could
fly open while the vehicle is
being driven, causing a total
loss of visibility, which might
result in an accident.
• The support rod must be
inserted completely into the
hole whenever you inspect the
engine compartment. This will
prevent the hood from falling
and possibly injuring you.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood raised. The view will
be blocked and the hood
could fall or be damaged.
ensure that all obstructions
are removed from the hood
opening. Closing the hood
with an obstruction present in
the hood opening may result
in property damage or severe
personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or
any other combustible material in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause a heatinduced fire.
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Hood
3-31
Convenient features of your vehicle
FUEL FILLER LID
Opening the fuel filler lid
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it “clicks”. This indicates that
the cap is securely tightened.
2. To close the lid, press the edge of
the lid. Make sure it is securely
closed.
WARNING
OLMB043220
OLMB043219
The fuel-filler lid must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pulling up
on the fuel-filler lid opener.
✽ NOTICE
If the fuel-filler lid will not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
3-32
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the
fuel filler lid opener up.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
open.
4. To remove the cap (2), turn the
fuel tank cap counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Refueling
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before completely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent
fuel spillage in the event of an
accident.
WARNING
Refueling dangers
(Continued)
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be
sure to place the container on
the ground prior to refueling.
Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun,
contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
Use only portable plastic fuel
containers designed to carry
and store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire.
(Continued)
3-33
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines
carefully. Failure to follow these
guidelines may result in severe
personal injury, severe burns or
death by fire or explosion.
• Read and follow all warning
posted at the gas station facility.
• Before refueling note the location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touching another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling since you can generate
static electricity by touching,
rubbing or sliding against any
item or fabric (polyester, satin,
nylon, etc.) capable of producing static electricity. Static
electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must reenter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a
metal part of the vehicle, away
from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.
(Continued)
Convenient features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• When refueling, always shut
the engine off. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine
can ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire. Once refueling is complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before starting the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a
lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station
especially during refueling.
Automotive fuel is highly
flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
• If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department. Follow
any safety instructions they
provide.
3-34
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the "Fuel
requirements" suggested in
foreword section.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, please make sure
that you use parts designed for
replacement in your vehicle.
An incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction
of the fuel system or emission
control system. For more
detailed information, we recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the
paint.
• After refueling, make sure the
fuel cap is installed securely
to prevent fuel spillage in the
event of an accident.
PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
Sunroof control lever
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
■ Type A
■ Type B
Do not continue to move the
sunroof control lever after the
sunroof is fully opened, closed,
or tilted. Damage to the motor
or system components could
occur.
3
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
CAUTION
Make sure the sunroof is fully
closed when leaving your vehicle. If the sunroof is opened,
rain or snow may leak through
the sunroof and wet the interior
as well as cause theft.
If the driver removes the ignition key
(Smart key : turns off the engine) and
opens the driver-side door when the
sunroof is not fully closed, the warning
chime will sound for approximately 7
seconds and
- Type A : Sunroof Open Warning Light
illuminate or blink for approximately 7
seconds.
- Type B : Sunroof open image will
appear on the LCD display.
Close the sunroof securely when leaving your vehicle.
3-35
Convenient features of your vehicle
WEL-400/OLMB043457
OLMB043277
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING
Sliding the sunroof
To open the sunroof automatically:
Pull the sunroof control lever backward to the second detent position
and then release it. The sunroof will
slide all the way open.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
• Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may
cause death, serious injury, or
property damage.
• If you would like to carry items
on the roof using a cross bar,
do not operate the sunroof.
• When carrying cargo on the
roof, do not load heavy items
above the sunroof or glass
roof.
• Do not allow children to operate the sunroof.
3-36
OLMB043222
Before opening or closing the sunroof,
open the roller blind.
To open the sunroof, pull the sunroof
control lever backward.
To close the sunroof, push or pull the
sunroof control lever with the safety
switch (1) forward or downward.
To close the sunroof automatically:
Push the sunroof control lever forward to the second detent position
and then release it. The sunroof will
automatically close all the way.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Automatic reversal
WARNING
Tilting the sunroof
• Never try pinching any part of
your body intentionally to
activate the Automatic reversal function.
• The Automatic reversal function may not work if something gets caught just before
the sunroof fully closes.
3
OLMB043224
Before opening or closing the sunroof,
open the roller blind.
To open the sunroof, push the sunroof
control lever upward.
To close the sunroof, pull the sunroof
lever with the safety switch (1) downward until the sunroof moves to the
desired position.
3-37
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043223
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof is closing
automatically, it will reverse the direction, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING
Roller blind
CAUTION
Operation of the roller blind
without using the handle (1)
may cause misalignment or
malfunction.
Sunroof
• Be careful that no head, hands
and body parts are obstructed
by a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sunroof while driving.
• Make sure your hands and
head are safely out of the way
before closing a sunroof.
CAUTION
• Periodically remove any dirt
that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is
below freezing or when the
sunroof is covered with snow
or ice, the glass or the motor
could be damaged.
• Do not leave the roller blind
closed while the sunroof is
opened.
3-38
✽ NOTICE
It is normal for wrinkles to form on
the blind because of its material
characteristic.
OLMB043221
The roller blinds are installed inside
of the sunroof and glass roof.
Open or close the roller blind manually using the handle (1) when you
need to.
Before opening or closing the sunroof, open the roller blind.
Resetting the sunroof
Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the followings)
- Battery is discharged or disconnected or the related fuse has been
replaced or disconnected
- The one-touch sliding function of the
sunroof does not normally operate
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Open the roller blind.
3. Close the sunroof.
4. Release the sunroof control lever.
5. Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close
(about 10 seconds) until the sunroof is moved a little. Then,
release the lever.
6. Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close until
the sunroof operates as follows;
TILT OPEN → SLIDE OPEN →
SLIDE CLOSE
Then, release the lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system has been reset.
3-39
Convenient features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL
Electric power steering
(if equipped)
Power steering uses the motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If
the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the
vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is
controlled by the power steering control unit which senses the steering
wheel torque and vehicle speed to
command the motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier
as the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for better control of
the steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend
that the system be checked by
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3-40
✽ NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not
illuminate.
• The steering effort is high immediately after turning the ignition
switch on. This happens as the system performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
is completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or
LOCK/OFF position.
• Motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
• The steering effort increases if the
steering wheel is rotated continuously when the vehicle is not in
motion. However, after a few minutes, it will return to its normal
conditions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may become difficult to
control or operate abnormally. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise could occur. If temperature rises, the noise will disappear.
This is a normal condition.
✽ NOTICE
Tilt steering
Power steering uses energy from the
engine to assist you in steering the
vehicle. If the engine is off or if the
power steering system becomes
inoperative, the vehicle may still be
steered, but it will require increased
steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, we recommend
that the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the power steering drive belt
breaks or if the power steering
pump malfunctions, the steering
effort will greatly increase.
A tilt steering wheel allows you to
adjust the steering wheel before you
drive. You can also raise it to give
your legs more room when you exit
and enter the vehicle.
CAUTION
Never hold the steering wheel
against a stop (extreme right or
left turn) for more than 5 seconds with the engine running.
Holding the steering wheel for
more than 5 seconds in either
position may cause damage to
the power steering pump.
✽ NOTICE
If the vehicle is parked for extended
periods outside in cold weather
(below -10°C/14°F), the power steering may require increased effort
when the engine is first started. This
is caused by increased fluid viscosity
due to the cold weather and does not
indicate a malfunction.
When this happens, increase the
engine RPM by depressing accelerator until the RPM reaches 1,500 rpm
then release or let the engine idle for
two or three minutes to warm up the
fluid.
The steering wheel should be positioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle and
height of steering wheel while
driving. You may lose your
steering control and cause
severe personal injury or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and
down to be certain it is locked
in position.
3-41
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Power steering (if equipped)
Convenient features of your vehicle
Horn
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely
to operate it, or hit it with your
fist. Do not press on the horn
with a sharp-pointed object.
OLMB043225
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3) (if
equipped), then pull up the lockrelease lever to lock the steering
wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the
steering wheel to the desired position before driving.
3-42
OLMB043227
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽ NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on
your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only
when this area is pressed.
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
WARNING
WARNING
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Do not adjust the rearview mirror while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious
injury or property damage.
3
Night
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision out
the rear window.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror
and do not install a wide mirror.
It could result in injury, during
an accident or deployment of
the air bag.
Day
OLMB043233
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of
vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
3-43
Convenient features of your vehicle
Rear visibility
Convenient features of your vehicle
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automatically controls the glare from the headlights of the car behind you in nighttime or low light driving conditions. The
sensor mounted in the mirror senses
the light level around the vehicle, and
automatically controls the headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare
is automatically controlled by the sensor mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into R (Reverse), the mirror will automatically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that
may cause the liquid cleaner to
enter the mirror housing.
3-44
■ Type A
Indicator
OLMB043008
■ Type B
Rearview display
Indicator
Sensor
OLMB043301
To operate the electric rearview
mirror:
• Press the on/off button (1) to turn
the automatic dimming function on.
The mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the on/off button to turn the
automatic dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
• The mirror defaults to the ON position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with compass
Heading display
- E : East
- W : West
- S : South
- N : North
ex) NE : North East
2. Calibration procedure
Press and hold the button for more
than 6 but less than 9 seconds. When
the compass memory is cleared a "C"
will appear in the display.
- Driving the vehicle in a circle at
less than 8km/h 2 times or until the
compass heading appears.
- Driving in a circle in right-handed
direction and opposite direction are
possible, and if the calibration is
completed, the compass heading
will appear.
- Keep driving in a circle until a compass heading appears.
Automatic dimming rear view mirror
controls automatically the glare of
headlights of the vehicle behind you
when it turned on by pressing and
holding the button for more than 3
but less than 6 seconds. It is turned
off by pressing and holding the button for same time once more.
3-45
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043302
1. Feature Control Button
2. Status Indicator LED
3. Rear Light Sensor
4. Display Window
1. To operate Compass feature
Press and release the compass button, then the vehicle's directional
heading will be displayed. Pressing
and releasing the button again will
turn off the display.
Convenient features of your vehicle
3. Setting the compass zone
1. Find your current location and
variance zone number on the
zone map.
3. Press the button until the new zone
number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button
in, the display will show a compass
direction within a few seconds.
Asia
Europe
B520C03JM
South America
B520C01JM
4. Changing Mirror Angle setting
(if equipped):
Due to mirror positions being angled
towards the driver, the compass mirror can also compensate for drivers
seated on the Left Hand side of the
vehicle (steering wheel on the LH
side of the vehicle) or Right Hand
side of the vehicle (steering wheel on
the RH side of the vehicle).
Africa
B520C04JM
B520C05JM
3-46
2. Press and hold the button for more
than 3 but less than 6 seconds.
The current zone number will
appear in the display.
To adjust the Left Hand, “L” or Right
Hand, “R”, setting:
1. Press and hold the button for more
than 9 seconds.
2. Release then press the button to
toggle between “L” and “R”.
✽ NOTICE
This procedure also causes the compass to be de-calibrated.
3. To re-calibrate the compass, drive
the vehicle in 2 complete circles at
less than 8km/h (5mph).
CAUTION
3-47
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
1. Do not install the ski rack,
antenna, etc. which are
attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet.They affect
the operation of the compass.
2. If the compass deviates from
the correct indication soon
after repeated adjustment, we
recommend that you have the
compass checked at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3. The compass may not indicate the correct compass
point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill.
(The compass returns to the
correct compass point when
the vehicle moves to an area
where the geomagnetism is
stabilized.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
4. When cleaning the mirror,
use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the
mirror as that may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch. The mirror heads can be folded back to prevent damage during an
automatic car wash or when passing
in a narrow street.
WARNING
Rearview mirrors
• The outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview
mirror or direct observation to
determine the actual distance
of following vehicles when
changing lanes.
3-48
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should
restrict movement of the mirror,
do not force the mirror for
adjustment. To remove ice, use
a deicer spray, or a sponge or
soft cloth with very warm water.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice,
do not adjust the mirror by force.
Use an approved spray de-icer
(not radiator antifreeze) to
release the frozen mechanism or
move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle is moving.This could result in
loss of control, and an accident
which could cause death, serious injury or property damage.
Remote control
CAUTION
Folding the outside rearview
mirror
• The mirrors stop moving
3
OLMB043237
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp
the housing of mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
3-49
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043236
Electric type
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the position of the left and right outside
rearview mirrors. To adjust the position of either mirror, move the lever
(1) to R (Right) or L (Left) to select
the right side mirror or the left side
mirror, then press a corresponding
point on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
After adjustment, put the lever into
neutral (center) position to prevent
inadvertent adjustment.
when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch
longer than necessary, the
motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
Convenient features of your vehicle
CAUTION
The electric type outside
rearview mirror operates even
though the ignition switch is in
the OFF position. However, to
prevent unnecessary battery
discharge, do not adjust the
mirrors longer than necessary
while the engine is not running.
OLMB043238
Electric type
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
depress the button.
To unfold it, depress the button again.
3-50
CAUTION
In case it is an electric type outside rearview mirror, don’t fold
it by hand. It could cause motor
failure.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB063020
The hazard warning flasher should
be used whenever you find it necessary to stop the car in a hazardous
location. When you must make such
an emergency stop, always pull off
the road as far as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned
on by pushing in the hazard switch.
This causes all turn signal lights to
blink. The hazard warning lights will
operate even though the key is not in
the ignition switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
3-51
Convenient features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A
- Gasoline engine
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
- Diesel engine
5. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
6. Odometer / Trip computer (if equipped)
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
OLM044350L/OLM044051L
3-52
■ Type B
- Gasoline engine
3
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped)
- Diesel engine
6. LCD display
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
OLM044352L/OLM044351L
3-53
Convenient features of your vehicle
1. Tachometer
Convenient features of your vehicle
Instrument Cluster Control
Instrument panel illumination
(if equipped)
■ Left-Hand drive type
The instrument cluster illumination
intensity can be adjusted by pressing
the control button with the headlight
switch in any position when the ignition switch is in ON position.
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING
OLMB043142
■ Right-Hand drive type
OLMB043142R
When the vehicle's parking lights or
headlights are on, press the illumination control button to adjust the instrument panel illumination intensity.
3-54
Never adjust the instrument
cluster while driving. This could
result in loss of control and lead
to an accident that may cause
death, serious injury, or property damage.
OLM043400/OLMB043401
• The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is displayed.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
LCD Display Control
(if equipped)
Gauges
Speedometer
■ Type A (km/h)
■ Type A, MPH(km/h)
■ Type A, km/h (MPH)
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043157
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons.
(1)
(2)
■ Type B (km/h)
■ Type B, MPH(km/h)
■ Type B, km/h (MPH)
: MODE button for changing
modes
: SELECT / RESET button
❈ For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
OLM049054/OLM049053/OLM049054N/OLMB043053N/OLM049054C/OLM043053C
The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and is calibrated in miles
per hour (MPH) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).
3-55
Convenient features of your vehicle
Tachometer
■ Type A (Gasoline)
■ Type B (Gasoline)
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.
CAUTION
■ Type A (Diesel)
■ Type B (Diesel)
OLMB043145/OLMB043145/OLMB043146/OLMB043146
3-56
Do not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
■ Type A
CAUTION
Fuel Gauge
■ Type A
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the "130 or H" position,
it indicates overheating that
may damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer to "If the
Engine Overheats" in chapter 6.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pressure
and could severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
OLMB043148/Q/ODMEMM2351
OLMB043147/Q/ODMEMM2352
This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON.
This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
3-57
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043148/Q
■ Type B
OLMB043147/Q
■ Type B
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
WARNING
Odometer
■ Type A
■ Type B
Fuel Gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the "0 or E
(Empty)" level.
OLMB043149
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire damaging the catalytic
converter.
3-58
The odometer Indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 kilometers or miles.
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle
Shift Indicator
(if equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Shift
Indicator (if equipped,
For Europe)
■ Type A
■ Type B
In the Sports Mode, this indicator
informs which gear is desired while
driving to save fuel.
• Shifting up : ▲2, ▲3, ▲4, ▲5, ▲6
• Shifting down : ▼1, ▼2, ▼3, ▼4, ▼5
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st
gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th, 5th,
or 6th gear).
When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.
This indicator informs which gear is
desired while driving to save fuel.
• Shifting up : ▲2, ▲3, ▲4, ▲5, ▲6
• Shifting down : ▼1, ▼2, ▼3, ▼4, ▼5
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st
gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th, 5th,
or 6th gear).
When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.
3-59
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Park : P
Reverse : R
Neutral : N
Drive : D
Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
■ Type A
■ Type B
This indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected.
•
•
•
•
•
Manual Transaxle Shift Indicator
(if equipped)
Convenient features of your vehicle
LCD DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
LCD Modes
Modes
Trip Computer
Information
User Settings
Symbol
Explanation
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days), and so on.
On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.
❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
3-60
Information Mode
Service Interval
OLMB043454
OLMB043453
Service in
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30
days, "Service in" message is displayed for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serviced according to the already inputted
service interval, “Service required”
message is displayed for several seconds each time you set the ignition
switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to
the ON position. (The mileage and
time changes to "---")
✽ NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
3-61
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before:
- Activate the reset mode by pressing
the SELECT/RESET button
for
more than 5 seconds, then press the
SELECT/RESET button
again for
more than 1 second (Europe).
- Press the SELECT/RESET button
for more than 1 second (Except
Europe).
Convenient features of your vehicle
User Settings Mode
Description
Door
Auto Door Lock (if equipped)
On this mode, you can change setting of the doors, lamps, and so on.
• Off:
The auto door lock operation will
be deactivated.
• Speed:
All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph).
• Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically
locked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted from the P
(Park) position to the R (Reverse),
N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
OLMB043455
3-62
Auto Door Unlock (if equipped)
• Off:
The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
• Key Out or Power Off:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key is
removed from ignition switch or
Engine Star/Stop Button is set to
the OFF position.
• Driver Door Unlock:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked if the driver's door is
unlocked.
• Shift Lever:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted to the P (Park)
position.
Lamp
Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the headlamp
delay and headlamp welcome function will be activated.
Settings
Language (if equipped)
Service Interval
Choose the language you prefer
within the LCD display.
Temperature Unit (if equipped)
Convert the temperature unit from °C
to °F or from °F to °C.
AVG Fuel Eco Reset
• Auto Reset:
The average fuel economy will
reset automatically when refueling.
• Manual Reset:
The average fuel economy will not
reset automatically whenever refueling.
For more details, refer to “Trip
Computer” in this chapter.
3
OLMB043456
On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(km or mi.) and period (months).
✽ NOTICE
If it is not available to set service
interval on your vehicle, we recommend that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3-63
Convenient features of your vehicle
Horn Feedback (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the horn feedback operation will be activated.
After locking the door by pressing the
lock button on the transmitter, if you
press the lock button again within 4
seconds, the warning sound will
operate once to indicate that all
doors are locked.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Warning Messages
Shift to "P" position
(for smart key system and automatic transaxle)
OLMB043407
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
3-64
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
Press start button while turn
steering (for smart key system)
OLMB043408
OLMB043409
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not
unlock normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is pressed.
• It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button while turning the steering wheel right and left.
Steering wheel unlocked
(for smart key system)
Check steering wheel lock
system (for smart key system)
Press brake pedal to start
engine (for smart key system
and automatic transaxle)
3
OLMB043411
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
OLMB043412
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
3-65
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043410
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not lock
when the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the OFF position.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Press clutch pedal to start
engine (for smart key system
and manual transaxle)
OLMB043413
• This warning message illuminates if
the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the clutch pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the clutch pedal to start the engine.
3-66
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
OLMB043415
OLMB043414
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
• It means that you always have the
smart key with you.
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
Press start button again
(for smart key system)
Press start button with smart
key (for smart key system)
Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH"
(for smart key system and automatic transaxle)
3
OLMB043417
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.
OLMB043418
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is disconnected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
3-67
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043416
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, we recommend
that you have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
(for smart key system and automatic transaxle)
Door Open
Tailgate Open
OLMB043459
OLMB043419
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
✽ NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
3-68
• It means that any door is open.
OLMB043458
• It means that the tailgate is open.
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043457
• It means that the sunroof is open.
3-69
Convenient features of your vehicle
TRIP COMPUTER
Overview
Description
■ Type A
✽ NOTICE
Trip Modes
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip mode is changed as below
whenever pushing the button shortly.
- Type A : TRIP button
- Type B : [ ]
• Type A (if equipped)
TRIP
Elapsed time
Distance
to empty *
Average
vehicle speed
Average fuel
economy *
Instant fuel
economy *
OLMB043156
■ Type B
OLMB043157
The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related
to driving.
3-70
* : if equipped
• Type B (if equipped)
Distance to empty /
Average fuel economy /
Instant fuel economy
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
■ Type A
■ Type B
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
Tripmeter B /
Average vehicle speed B /
Elapsed time B
OLMB043158/OLMB043159/
OLMB043160/OLMB043405
❈ For controlling the LCD modes,
refer to "LCD Display Control" in
this chapter.
• Type A
TRIP : Tripmeter
• Type B
TRIP A :
Tripmeter A→
• The average vehicle speed is calculated by the total driving distance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 km/h or MPH
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the trip button (Type A : TRIP,
) for more than 1 secType B :
ond when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
: Order changed
3-71
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Tripmeter A /
Average vehicle speed A /
Elapsed time A
TRIP B :
: Order changed
Tripmeter B→
• The tripmeter is the total driving
distance since the last tripmeter
reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km
or mi.
• To reset the tripmeter, press Trip
)
button (Type A : TRIP, Type B :
for more than 1 second when the
tripmeter is displayed.
Convenient features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not
displayed if the driving distance is
less than 300 meters (0.186 miles)
or the driving time is less than 10
seconds since the ignition switch
or Engine Start/Stop button is
turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps
going while the engine is running.
Distance To Empty (1)
Fuel Economy
■ Type A
■ Type B
✽ NOTICE
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driving time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press the
trip button (Type A : TRIP, Type B :
) for more than 1 second when
the elapsed time is displayed.
✽ NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
3-72
• The distance to empty is the estimated distance the vehicle can be
driven with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range: 50 ~ 9999 km or
30 ~ 9999 mi.
• If the estimated distance is below 50
km (30 mi.), the trip computer will
display “---” as distance to empty.
OLMB043161/OLMB043165/
OLMB043164/OLMB043404
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the distance to empty
function may not operate correctly.
• The distance to empty may differ
from the actual driving distance as
it is an estimate of the available
driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6
liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel are
added to the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and distance to
empty may vary significantly based
on driving conditions, driving
habits, and condition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the trip button (Type
) for more than 1
A : TRIP, Type B :
second when the average fuel economy is displayed.
Automatic reset
The average fuel economy will be
cleared to zero (---) when the vehicle
speed exceeds 1 km/h after refueling
more than 6 liters (1.6 gallons).
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few seconds when the vehicle speed is
more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
- Fuel economy range:
Type A : 0 ~ 99.9 L/100 km or MPG
Type B : 0 ~ 30L/100 km or 0 ~ 50
MPG
✽ NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not displayed for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more than
10 seconds or 300 meters (0.186 miles)
since the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
3-73
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
L/100km or MPG
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automatically.
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning lights
✽ NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 2.
3-74
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dualdiagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
WARNING
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, we recommend
that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
3-75
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check
the brake fluid level immediately
and add fluid as required (For
more details, refer to “Brake Fluid”
in chapter 7). Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks. If any
leak on brake system is still found,
the warning light remains on, or
the brakes do not operate properly, do not drive the vehicle.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle towed to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
inspected.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate
at the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Electronic Brake force
Distribution (EBD) System
Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
(Continued)
3-76
(Continued)
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
We recommend you have the
vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
✽ NOTICE - Electronic Brake
force Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, we recommend you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
Warning Light
(if equipped)
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
indicator (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
The low tire pressure telltale comes
on for 3 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the "ON" position.
The low tire pressure and position
telltales illuminate when one or more
of your tires is significantly underinflated.
The low tire pressure telltale will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System.
If this occurs, we recommend that
the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For details, refer to the TPMS on
chapter 6.
WARNING
Safe stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
3-77
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors.
• If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL)
Diesel Engine with DPF
(if equipped)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
affect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
When the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) blinks, it may stop
blinking after driving the vehicle:
- at more than 60km/h (37 mph),
or
- at more than 2nd gear with
1500 ~ 2000 engine rpm for a
certain time (for about 25 minutes).
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) continues to blink in
spite of the procedure, we recommend that you have the DPF
system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If you continue to drive with the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
blinking for a long time, the DPF
system can be damaged and fuel
consumption can worsen.
CAUTION
Gasoline Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
3-78
CAUTION
CAUTION
Charging System
Warning Light
Diesel Engine
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
• When the engine coolant temperature is above 120°C (248°F). This
means that the engine is overheated and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to “Overheating” in chapter 6.
CAUTION
Engine Overheating
Do not continue driving with the
engine overheated. Otherwise
engine may be damaged.
3-79
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) blinks, some error related
to the injection quantity adjustment occurs which could result
in loss of engine power, combustion noise and poor emission.
In this case, we recommend
that you have the engine control
system inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
Convenient features of your vehicle
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). If
the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not available, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
3-80
CAUTION
Engine Oil Pressure Warning
Light
• If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine
Oil Pressure Warning Light is
illuminated, severe damage
could result.
• If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be
serious engine damage or
malfunction. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and
check the oil level. If the oil
level is low, fill the engine
oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after
the engine is started, turn
the engine off immediately.
In this case, we recommend
that you have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Low Fuel Level
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.
CAUTION
Low Fuel Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below “0 or E” can cause the
engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter (if equipped).
Door Ajar Warning
Light
Fuel Filter Warning
Light (Diesel Engine)
This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not close securely.
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When water has accumulated
inside the fuel filter.
In this case, remove the water from
the fuel filter.
For more details, refer to “Fuel
Filter” in chapter 7.
CAUTION
Fuel Filter Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the tailgate is not close
securely.
Sunroof Open Warning
Light (if equipped)
If the driver removes the ignition key
(Smart key : turns off the engine) and
opens the driver-side door when the
sunroof is not fully closed, the warning chime will sound for approximately 7 seconds and Sunroof Open
Warning Light illuminate or blink for
approximately 7 seconds.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
3-81
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Tailgate Open Warning
Light
Never use gasohol which contains methanol.
• When the Fuel Filter Warning
Light illuminates, engine
power (vehicle speed & idle
speed) may decrease.
• If you keep driving with the
warning light on, engine parts
(injector, common rail, high
pressure fuel pump) may be
damaged. If this occurs, we
recommend that you have the
vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
Convenient features of your vehicle
4 Wheel Drive (4WD)
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the 4WD system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Overspeed Warning
Light (if equipped)
120
km/h
This warning light blinks:
• When you drive the vehicle more
than 120 km/h.
- This is to prevent you from driving
your vehicle with overspeed.
- The overspeed warning chime
also sound for approximately 5
seconds.
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
3-82
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in your key properly
while the ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates for
up to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
3-83
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart
Key) (if equipped)
Convenient features of your vehicle
This indicator light illuminates for
2 seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehicle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine” in section 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3-84
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
Low Beam Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may a malfunction with the turn signal system. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle
inspected
by
an
authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illuminate at all.
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
Glow Indicator Light
(Diesel Engine)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the engine is being preheated with the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button in the ON
position.
- The engine can be started after
the glow indicator light goes off.
- The illumination time varies with
the engine coolant temperature,
air temperature, and battery condition.
Rear Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the rear fog lights are on.
If the indicator light remains on or
blinks after the engine has warmed
up or while driving, there may a malfunction with the engine preheating
system.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3-85
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Light ON Indicator
Light
Convenient features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE - Engine Preheating
If the engine does not start within 10
seconds after the preheating is completed, set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the
LOCK or OFF position for 10 seconds and then to the ON position in
order to preheat the engine again.
4 Wheel Drive (4WD)
LOCK Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you select 4WD Lock mode
by pressing the 4WD LOCK button.
- The 4WD LOCK mode is to
increase the drive power when
driving on wet pavement, snow
covered roads and/or off-road.
CAUTION
4WD Lock Mode
Do not use 4WD LOCK mode on
dry paved roads or highway, it
can cause noise, vibration or
damage of 4WD related parts.
3-86
Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)
CRUISE
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
SET
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is
set.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
Downhill Brake Control
(DBC) Indicator Light
(if equipped)
For more details, refer to “Downhill
Brake Control (DBC) System” in
chapter 5.
KEY OUT indicator
(if equipped)
KEY
OUT
When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC or ON position,
if any door is open, the system
checks for the smart key. If the smart
key is not in the vehicle, the indicator
will blink, and if all doors are closed,
the chime will also sound for about 5
seconds. The indicator will go off
while the vehicle is moving. Keep the
smart key in the vehicle.
This warning light blinks:
• When the DBC is operating.
3-87
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you activate the DBC system by pressing the DBC button.
This warning light illuminates yellow:
• When there is a malfunction with
the DBC system.
In this case, we recommend that
you have the vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Convenient features of your vehicle
LIGHTING
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when
the driver removes the ignition key
and opens the driver- side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights
will be turned off automatically if
the driver parks on the side of road
at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed,
perform the following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
3-88
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except
driver’s door), the battery saver
function does not operate.
Therefore, it causes the battery
to be discharged. In this case,
make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
Headlight (Headlamp) escort
function (if equipped)
The headlights (and/or taillights)
remain on for approximately 5 minutes after the ignition key is removed
or turned to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if the driver’s door is
opened and closed, the headlights
are turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmitter or smart key twice or turning
off the light switch from the headlight
or Auto light position.
Lighting control
Parking light position (
)
Headlight position (
)
3
OLMB043258
OLMB043259
When the light switch is in the parking light position, the tail, position,
license and instrument panel lights
are ON.
When the light switch is in the headlight position the head, tail, position,
license and instrument panel lights
are ON.
✽ NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
3-89
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043257
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto light position (if equipped)
CAUTION
High - beam operation
• Never place anything over the
OLMB043260
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and headlights will be turned ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount
of light outside the vehicle.
sensor (1) located on the
instrument panel, this will
ensure better auto-light system
control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleaner
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor
operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of coating on
the front windshield, the Auto
light system may not work
properly.
OLMB043262
1. Turn the light switch to the headlight position.
2. Push the lever away from you.
✽ NOTICE
• The high-beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
• To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
3-90
WARNING
Flashing headlights
Turn signals and lane change
signals
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver's vision.
3
OLMB043263
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A). Green arrow indicators on
the instrument panel indicate which
turn signal is operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is
completed. If the indicator continues
to flash after a turn, manually return
the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
3-91
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043261
Pull the lever towards you. It will
return to the normal position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.
Convenient features of your vehicle
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
Front fog light (if equipped)
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the
fog lights when visibility is poor.
One-touch lane change function
(if equipped)
To activate an one-touch lane
change function, move the turn signal lever slightly and then release it.
The lane change signals will blink 3
times.
OLMB043264
✽ NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.
3-92
CAUTION
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc.
1. Turn on the park light.
2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front
fog light position.
3. To turn off the front fog light, turn
the light switch to the front fog light
position again or turn off the park
light.
Rear fog light (if equipped)
■ Type A
■ Type B
To turn the rear fog lights off, do one
of the following:
• Turn off the headlight switch.
• Turn the light switch to the rear fog
light position again.
• When the light switch in the park
light, if you turn off the front fog light,
the rear fog light will also turn off.
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, and it is especially
helpful after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will turn off the dedicated lamp when:
1. The front fog light or headlight (low
beam) switch is ON.
2. The engine is OFF.
OLMB043304
To turn on the rear fog lights, do one
of the following:
3-93
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043303
• Position the light switch in the
headlight position and then turn
the light switch (1) to the rear fog
light position.
• Position the light switch in the park
light, turn the light switch to the
front fog light (if equipped) position,
and then turn the light switch (1) to
the rear fog light position.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
Manual type
■ Left-Hand drive type
OLMB043305
■ Right-Hand drive type
To adjust the headlight beam level
according to the number of the passengers and the loading weight in
the luggage area, turn the beam leveling switch.
The higher the number of the switch
is positioned, the lower the headlight
beam level. Always keep the headlight beam at the proper leveling
position, or headlights may dazzle
other road users.
Listed below are the examples of proper switch settings. For loading conditions other than those listed below,
adjust the switch position so that the
beam level may be the nearest as the
condition obtained according to the list.
Loading condition
Driver only
Driver + Front passenger
OLMB043305R
3-94
Switch position
0
0
Full passengers
(including driver)
1
Full passengers (including
driver) + Maximum permissible loading
2
Driver + Maximum permissible loading
3
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wiper/washer
Rear window wiper/washer
/
AUTO*
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
AUTO* – Auto control wipe
· LO– Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
D : Rear wiper/washer control*
· ON – Continuous wipe
· INT – Intermittent wipe
(if equipped)
· OFF – Off
* : if equipped
Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
move the lever to this (MIST)
position and release it. The
wipers will operate continuously if the lever is held in this
position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob.
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
✽ NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield,
defrost the windshield for about 10
minutes, or until the snow and/or ice
is removed before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation. If you do not remove the snow
and/or ice before using the wiper
and washer, it may damage the
wiper and washer system.
3-95
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043306/OLMB043307
Windshield wipers
Convenient features of your vehicle
Auto control (if equipped)
Rain sensor
OLMB043268
The rain sensor located on the upper
end of the windshield glass senses
the amount of rainfall and controls
the wiping cycle for the proper interval. The more it rains, the faster the
wiper operates.
When the rain stops, the wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO
mode when the ignition switch is ON,
the wiper will operate once to perform a self-check of the system. Set
the wiper to OFF position when the
wiper is not in use.
3-96
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON
and the windshield wiper switch
is placed in the AUTO mode, use
caution in the following situations to avoid any injury to the
hands or other parts of the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of
the windshield glass facing
the rain sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of
the windshield glass with a
damp or wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the
windshield glass.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set
the wiper switch in the OFF
position to stop the auto wiper
operation.
The wiper may operate and be
damaged if the switch is set in
the AUTO mode while washing
the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
passenger side windshield
glass. Damage to system parts
could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in
winter, set the wiper switch in
the OFF position. Otherwise,
wipers may operate and ice may
damage the windshield wiper
blades. Always remove all snow
and ice and defrost the windshield properly prior to operating the windshield wipers.
Windshield washers
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
CAUTION
OLMB043270
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with the
defrosters; the washer solution
could freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision.
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper blades, do not use
gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or
near them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers and washer system, use anti-freezing washer
fluids in the winter season or
cold weather.
3-97
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
CAUTION
Convenient features of your vehicle
Rear window wiper and washer
switch
OLMB043271
OLMB043269
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to the desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
ON - Normal wiper operation
INT - Intermittent wiper operation
(if equipped)
OFF - Wiper is not in operation
3-98
Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue until
you release the lever. (if equipped)
INTERIOR LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the
engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.
Accidents
could
happen
because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
Map lamp
• When all entrances are closed, if
you lock the vehicle by using the
transmitter or the smart key, all
interior lamp will be off within 5
seconds.
• If you do not operate anything in
the vehicle after turning off the
engine, the lights will turn off after
20 minutes.
3
OLMB043277
Push the lens to turn the map lamp
on or off.
• ON : The light (with room lamp)
stays on at all times.
3-99
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING
Interior lamp AUTO cut
Convenient features of your vehicle
• DOOR : The light (with room lamp)
comes on when any door
(except
tailgate)
is
opened regardless of the
ignition switch position.
When doors (except tailgate) are unlocked by the
transmitter (or smart key),
the light (with room lamp)
comes on for approximately 30 seconds as
long as any door (except
tailgate) is not opened.
Also, the light (with room
lamp) goes out gradually
after approximately 30 seconds if the door (except tailgate) is closed. However, if
the ignition switch is ON or
all doors (except tailgate)
are locked, the light will turn
off immediately.
If a door (except tailgate)
is opened with the ignition
switch in the ACC or
LOCK position, the light
(with room lamp) stays on
for about 20 minutes.
3-100
However, if a door (except
tailgate) is opened with the
ignition switch in the ON
position, the light (with
room lamp) stays on continuously.
• OFF : The light (only map lamp)
stays off at all times.
❈ When the lamp is turned
ON by pressing the lens
(1), the lamp does not turn
off even if the switch (2) is
in the OFF position.
Room lamp
OLMB043273
Press the button to turn the light on
or off.
Vanity mirror lamp
Luggage room lamp
Glove box lamp
3
OLMB043276
OLMB043275
Push the switch to turn the light on or
off.
•
: The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed.
•
: The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
The luggage room lamp comes on
when the tailgate is opened.
The glove box lamp comes on when
the light switch is in the parking light
position or headlight position and the
glove box is opened.
CAUTION
Vanity mirror lamp
Always have the switch in the
off position when the vanity
mirror lamp is not in use. If the
sunvisor is closed without the
lamp off, it may discharge the
battery or damage the sunvisor.
3-101
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043274
Convenient features of your vehicle
DEFROSTER
CAUTION
Rear window defroster
• To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center facia switch panel. The indicator
on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster
is ON.
• To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button again.
■ Type A
To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
✽ NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front
windshield,
refer
to
“Windshield
Defrosting
and
Defogging” in this section.
OLMB043101
■ Type B
OLMB043102
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while engine is running.
3-102
✽ NOTICE
• If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it
off before operating the rear
defroster.
• The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the
ignition switch is turned off.
Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
Wiper deicer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on
the rear window defroster.
With smart key
If your vehicle is equipped with the
wiper deicer, it will operate at the
same time you turn on the rear window defroster.
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043103
Without smart key
The engine must be running to
enable this feature. To activate the
front wiper deicer, press the front
wiper deicer button. The indicator on
the button illuminates when the
deicer is ON.
The front wiper deicer automatically
turns off after 20 minutes or when
the ignition switch is turned off. To
turn off the deicer, press the front
wiper deicer button again.
3-103
Convenient features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Type A
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Front windshield defroster button
3. MAX A/C selection button (if equipped)
4. Temperature control knob
5. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
6. Mode selection button
7. Air intake control button
■ Type B
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the
ignition switch is in the ON
position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the
blower when the engine is running.
OLMB043104/OLMB043105
3-104
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
3
3-105
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043106
Convenient features of your vehicle
Mode selection
Face-Level (B, D)
OLMB043107
The mode buttons control the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent Face,
Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and
Defrost air position.
3-106
Floor/Defrost-Level
(A, C, D, E)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E)
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window
defrosters.
Floor-Level (A, C, E, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Temperature control
■ Type A
3
OLMB043109
MAX A/C-Level (if equipped)
To select the MAX A/C, turn the fan
speed control knob to the right then
press the MAX A/C button.
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
OLMB043110
■ Type B
OLMB043111
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the air temperature in the
passenger compartment, turn the
knob to the right position for warm and
hot air or left position for cooler air.
3-107
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043108
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air intake control
Recirculated air position
■ Type A
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat■ Type B
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
■ Type A
OLMB043112
■ Type B
OLMB043113
The air intake control is used to
select the outside (fresh) air position
or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position, press the control button.
3-108
Outside (fresh) air position
■ Type A
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
■ Type B
function selected.
✽ NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger
compartment
may
become stale. In addition, prolonged
use of the air conditioning with the
recirculated air position selected will
result in excessively dry air in the
passenger compartment.
WARNING
Fan speed control
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the air
flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the “0” position turns off the fan.
■ Type A
• Continue using the climate
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
control system in the recirculated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continue using the climate
control system in the recirculated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
OLMB043114
■ Type B
OLMB043115
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
3-109
Convenient features of your vehicle
To turn off the blowers
Air conditioning (if equipped)
■ Type A
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
OLMB043116
■ Type B
Heating
OLMB043118
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator light
will illuminate). Press the button again
to turn the air conditioning system off.
OLMB043117
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the "0" position.
3-110
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or
position.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the blower fan but
turn the air conditioning system
off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside
the vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to
electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with
the windows closed.
3-111
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• Use air conditioning to reduce
humidity and moisture inside the
vehicle on rainy or humid days.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system performance.
3-112
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower
Climate control
air filter
Evaporator
core
Heater core
1LDA5047
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this happens, we recommend that the climate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a bad influence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Vehicles equipped with R-134a
Because the refrigerant is at very high
pressure, the air conditioning
system
should only be serviced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage
to the vehicle and personal injury.
3-113
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough
roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Convenient features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
■ Type A
1. AUTO (automatic control) button
2. Driver's temperature control knob
3. A/C display
4. Passenger's temperature control knob
5. Dual temperature control selection button
6. OFF button
7. Front windshield defroster button
8. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
9. Fan speed control switch
10. Air intake control button
■ Type B
11. Mode selection button
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the
ignition switch is in the ON
position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the
blower when the engine is running.
OLMB043126/OLMB043126R
3-114
✽ NOTICE
Automatic heating and air conditioning
OLMB043121
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by setting the temperature.
2. Set the Driver’s temperature control switch to the desired temperature.
3-115
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043122
• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control switch
The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
23°C/73°F.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Manual heating and air conditioning
OLMB043123
✽ NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor located on the instrument panel
to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.
3-116
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pressing
buttons or turning knob(s) other than
the AUTO button. In this case, the
system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons or knob(s)
selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
Mode selection
OLMB043124
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Refer to the illustration in the
“Manual climate control system”.
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
3
Floor/Defrost-Level
OLMB043125
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
3-117
Convenient features of your vehicle
Bi-Level
Floor-Level
Convenient features of your vehicle
Temperature control
When turning the knob, the temperature will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F.
■ Type A
OLMB043109
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
OLMB043126
■ Type B
OLMB043126R
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to
the right extremely.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to
the left extremely.
3-118
When the driver side temperature is
set to the highest (HIGH) or lowest
(LOW) temperature, the DUAL mode
deactivates for maximum heating or
cooling.
OLMB043127
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate
the driver and passenger side
temperature individually. Also, if
the passenger side temperature
control button is operated, it will
automatically change to the DUAL
mode as well.
2. Operate the driver side temperature
control to adjust the driver side temperature. Operate the passenger
side temperature control to adjust
the passenger side temperature.
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature
mode between Centigrade to
Fahrenheit as follows:
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more.
The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
3-119
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to
deactivate DUAL mode. The passenger side temperature will be
set to the same temperature as
the driver side.
2. Operate the driver side temperature control button. The driver and
passenger side temperature will
be adjusted equally.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air intake control
Outside thermometer
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
OLMB043128
OLMB043129
The current outside temperature is
displayed in 1°C (1°F) increments.
The temperature range is between
-40°C ~ 60°C (-40°F ~ 140°F).
• The outside temperature on the
display may not change immediately like a general thermometer to
prevent the driver from being inattentive.
The air intake control is used to
select the outside (fresh) air position
or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position, press the control button.
3-120
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽ NOTICE
WARNING
Fan speed control
• Continue using the climate
control system in the recirculated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
the vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continue using the climate
control system in the recirculated air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
3
OLMB043130
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by operating the fan
speed control switch.
To change the fan speed, press ( )
the switch for higher speed, or push
( ) the switch for lower speed. To
turn the fan speed control off, press
the front blower OFF button.
3-121
Convenient features of your vehicle
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger
compartment
may
become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated
air position selected will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air conditioning
OFF mode
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
OLMB043131
OLMB043132
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
Press the front blower OFF button to
turn off the front air climate control
system. However, you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons
as long as the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
3-122
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or
position.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems
are filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Push the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the blower fan but
turn the air conditioning system
off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may create water droplets inside
the vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to
electrical equipment, air conditioning should only be used with
the windows closed.
3-123
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• Use air conditioning to reduce
humidity and moisture inside the
vehicle on rainy or humid days.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system performance.
3-124
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower
Climate control
air filter
Evaporator
core
Heater core
1LDA5047
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this happens, we recommend that the climate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a bad influence on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Vehicles equipped with R-134a
Because the refrigerant is at very high
pressure, the air conditioning
system
should only be serviced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, it may cause damage
to the vehicle and personal injury.
3-125
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough
roads, more frequent climate control air filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Convenient features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING
Windshield heating
Do not use the
or
position during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and the
windshield could cause the
outer surface of the windshield
to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode
selection to the
position
and fan speed control to the
lower speed.
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
■ Type A
OLMB043133
■ Type B
OLMB043134
3-126
To defrost outside windshield
■ Type A
1. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
2. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
3. Select the
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning (if equipped) will be
selected automatically.
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the
or
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically. If the
position is selected, air conditioning (if equipped) will also be
selected automatically.
If the air conditioning (if equipped)
and/or outside (fresh) air position are
not selected automatically, press the
corresponding button manually.
OLMB043135
■ Type B
OLMB043136
3-127
Convenient features of your vehicle
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windshield
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually. If the
position is selected, lower fan speed is
adjusted to a higher fan speed.
To defrost outside windshield
OLMB043138
OLMB043137
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh)
air position will be selected automatically.
3-128
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh)
air position will be selected automatically.
Defogging logic
To reduce the possibility of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning (if
equipped) are controlled automatically according to certain conditions
such as
or
position. To cancel
or return to the defogging logic, do
the following.
Manual climate control system
■ Type A
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
OLMB043140
3-129
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043139
■ Type B
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to
the defrost position (
).
3. Press the air intake control button
at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake
control button will blink 3 times with
0.5 second of interval. It indicates that
the defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.
Convenient features of your vehicle
CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)
Automatic climate control system
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
OLM044353
OLMB043141
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Select the defroster position pressing the defroster button (
).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button (Recirculated air
button) at least 5 times within 3
seconds.
The A/C display blinks 3 times with
0.5 second of interval. It indicates that
the defogging logic is canceled or
returned to the programmed status.
3-130
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns
on automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off
automatically, when the ignition
switch turns to the OFF position.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Center console storage
Glove box
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to
place so many items in the
storage compartment that the
storage compartment cover
can not close securely.
Flammable materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.
OLMB043278
OLMB043279
To open the center console storage,
push the lever and then lift up the
cover.
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a key. (1)
To open the glove box, pull the handle
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
3-131
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING
Sunglass holder
WARNING
• Do not keep objects except
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove
box for a long time.
OLMB043280
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses in the
compartment door with the lenses
facing out. Push to close.
3-132
sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglasses
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses
forcibly into a sunglass holder
to prevent breakage or deformation of glasses. It may
cause personal injury if you
try to open it forcibly when the
glasses are jammed in holder.
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
We recommend that you use parts
for replacement from an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Ashtray (if equipped)
WARNING
• Holding the lighter in after it is
CAUTION
The use of plug-in accessories
(shavers, hand-held vacuums,
and coffee pots, for example)
may damage the socket or
cause electrical failure.
3
OLMB043282
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it
out.
WARNING
Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtray as a waste receptacle.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches in an ashtray with other
combustible materials may
cause a fire.
3-133
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043281
For the cigarette lighter to work, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC
position or the ON position.
To use the cigarette lighter:
1. Open the cover by pressing the
switch.
2. Push the lighter all the way into the
socket.
When the element has heated, the
lighter will pop out to the "ready"
position.
heated will cause it to overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it
to prevent overheating.
• Do not insert foreign objects
into the socket of the cigarette
lighter. It may damage the cigarette lighter.
Convenient features of your vehicle
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
WARNING
WARNING
■ Front
Keep cans and bottles out of
direct sunlight. Placing them in
a hot vehicle can cause them to
explode.
Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups
of hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
If the hot liquid spills, you may
burn yourself. Such a burn to
the driver could lead to loss of
control of the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden
stop or collision, do not place
uncovered or unsecured bottles, glasses, cans, etc., in the
cup holder while the vehicle is
in motion.
3-134
OLMB043283
■ Rear (if equipped)
OLMB043284
To use the center cup holder, pull
down the armrest.
Sunvisor
Push the switch to turn the light on or
off. (if equipped)
•
: The light turns on.
•
: The light turns off.
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
Power outlet
■ Front
3
CAUTION
• Always have the switch in the
OLMB043285
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the
side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or backward (3). (if equipped)
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
off position when the vanity
mirror lamp is not in use. If the
sunvisor is closed without the
lamp off, it may discharge the
battery or damage the sunvisor.
• Always use the sunvisor
extension, after swing the
sunvisor to the side.
WARNING
For your safety, do not block
your view when using the sunvisor.
OLMB043286
■ Rear (if equipped)
OLMB043287
The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
3-135
Convenient features of your vehicle
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Convenient features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• Use power outlet only when
•
•
•
•
the engine is running and
remove the accessory plug
after use. Using the accessory
plug for prolonged periods of
time with the engine off could
cause the battery to discharge.
Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than
10A in electric capacity.
Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power
outlet.
Close the cover when not in
use.
Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices
may cause excessive audio
static and malfunctions in
other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
3-136
WARNING
Digital clock (if equipped)
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand. You may get electrocuted or fire may occur.
OLMB043288
WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while
driving.You may lose your steering control and cause severe
personal injury or accidents.
Whenever the battery terminals or
related fuses are disconnected, you
must reset the time.
When the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position, the clock buttons operate as follows:
Setup the clock
With audio off
✽ NOTICE
Aux, USB and iPod®
(if equipped)
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
1. Press the [SETUP CLOCK] button
until the clock of the display blinks.
2. Set the clock by turning the knob
(1) and press it.
❈ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
OLMB043296
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB (universal serial bus) port, you
can use an aux port to connect audio
devices and an USB port to plug in
an USB and iPod®.
3-137
Convenient features of your vehicle
Floor mat anchor(s)
(if equipped)
WARNING
OLMB043289
When using a floor mat on the front
floor carpet, make sure it attaches to
the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from
sliding forward.
3-138
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle’s floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single
floor mat should be installed
in each position.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation, we recommend that the
HYUNDAI floor mat designed for
use in your vehicle be installed.
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
OLMB043291
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the four
holders located in the cargo area to
attach the luggage net.
If necessary, we recommend that you
contact your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to obtain a luggage net.
✽ NOTICE
Vehicles equipped with a luggage
rail system may use the shackles to
hook the luggage net.
CAUTION
To use the cargo security
screen
Cargo security screen
(if equipped)
To prevent damage to the goods
or the vehicle, care should be
taken when carrying fragile or
bulky objects in the luggage
compartment.
3
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path. DO NOT use the luggage net when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.
OLMB043292
OLMB043293
Use the cargo security screen to
hide items stored in the cargo area.
1. Pull the cargo security screen
towards the rear of the vehicle by
the handle (1).
2. Insert the guide pin into the guide
(2).
✽ NOTICE
Pull out the cargo security screen
with the handle in the center to prevent the guide pin from falling out of
the guide.
3-139
Convenient features of your vehicle
WARNING
Convenient features of your vehicle
When the cargo security screen is
not in use:
1. Pull the cargo security screen
backward and up to release it from
the guides.
2. The cargo security screen will
automatically slide back in.
To remove the cargo security
screen
• Do not place objects on the
✽ NOTICE
The cargo security screen may not
automatically slide back in if the
cargo security screen is not fully
pulled out. Fully pull it out and then
let go.
OLMB043294
1. Push in the guide pin.
2. While pushing the guide pin, pull
out the cargo security screen.
3. Open the luggage tray and keep the
cargo security screen in the tray.
3-140
WARNING
cargo security screen. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle occupants
during an accident or when
braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in
the luggage compartment. It
is designed for luggage only.
• Maintain the balance of the
vehicle and locate the weight
as forward as possible.
CAUTION
Since the cargo security screen
may be damaged or malformed,
do not put luggage on it when it
is used.
EXTERIOR FEATURES
Roof rack (if equipped)
CAUTION
• When carrying cargo on the
OLMB043295
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, be sure not to position cargo
onto the roof rack in such a way that
it could interfere with sunroof operation.
WARNING
• The following specification is
the maximum weight that can
be loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly
as possible onto the roof rack
and secure the load firmly.
ROOF
RACK
100 kg (220 lbs.)
EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight
limit on the roof rack may
damage your vehicle.
(Continued)
3-141
3
Convenient features of your vehicle
roof rack, take the necessary
precautions to make sure the
cargo does not damage the
roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects
on the roof rack, make sure
they do not exceed the overall
roof length or width.
(Continued)
• The vehicle center of gravity will
be higher when items are
loaded onto the roof rack.
Avoid sudden starts, braking,
sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers
or high speeds that may result
in loss of vehicle control or
rollover resulting in an accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn
corners carefully when carrying items on the roof rack.
Severe wind updrafts, caused
by passing vehicles or natural
causes, can cause sudden
upward pressure on items
loaded on the roof rack. This
is especially true when carrying large, flat items such as
wood panels or mattresses.
This could cause the items to
fall off the roof rack and cause
damage to your vehicle or
others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo while driving, check frequently before or while driving
to make sure the items on the
roof rack are securely fastened.
Multimedia System
AUDIO SYSTEM ......................................................4-2
Antenna ...............................................................................4-2
Audio remote control .......................................................4-3
HOW VEHICLE AUDIO WORKS
(FOR EUROPE) ..........................................................4-4
Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio ...............4-5
CD PLAYER (FOR RDS MODEL) :
AC200TMEE, AC210TMEE............4-12
CD PLAYER : AC100TMEG, AC110TMEG,
AC100TMEE, AC110TMEE............4-13
System controllers and functions
(for RDS model)...............................................................4-14
System controllers and functions...............................4-17
Setup (for RDS model)...................................................4-20
Setup ..................................................................................4-25
Radio (for RDS model) ...................................................4-35
Radio...................................................................................4-37
Basic method of use ......................................................4-39
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio .....................4-46
Appendix............................................................................4-52
HOW VEHICLE AUDIO WORKS
(EXCEPT EUROPE)...............................................4-53
Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio .............4-54
CD PLAYER : AC100TMGG, AC110TMGG,
AC100TMGE, AC110TMGE,
AC100TMGN, AC110TMGN,
AC100TMGL*, AC110TMGL* .......4-61
System controllers and functions...............................4-62
Setup ..................................................................................4-65
Radio...................................................................................4-74
Basic method of use ......................................................4-76
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio .....................4-84
Appendix............................................................................4-89
4
Multimedia System
AUDIO SYSTEM
✽ NOTICE
• If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio
and electronic device may malfunction.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,
hand cleaner and air freshener
from contacting the interior parts
because they may cause damage
or discoloration.
Antenna
Roof antenna
■ Type A
CAUTION
• Before entering a place with a
■ Type B
OLMB043298
Your car uses a roof antenna to
receive both AM and FM broadcast
signals. This antenna is a removable
type. To remove the antenna, turn it
counterclockwise. To install the
antenna, turn it clockwise.
4-2
low height clearance or a car
wash, remove surely the
antenna by rotating it counterclockwise. If not, the antenna
may be damaged.
• When reinstalling your antenna, it is important that it is
fully tightened and adjusted
to the upright position to
ensure proper reception. The
antenna can be folded or
removed when parking the
vehicle or when loading cargo
on the roof rack.
• When cargo is loaded on the
roof rack, do not place the
cargo near the antenna pole
to ensure proper reception.
MODE (1)
Audio remote control
(if equipped)
Press the button to select Radio, CD
(compact disc), USB or AUX (if
equipped).
CDP mode
It will function as the TRACK
UP/DOWN button.
VOL (+ / -) (3)
SEEK (
/
) (2)
If the SEEK button is pressed for 0.8
second or more, it will work as follows in each mode.
• Press the up button (+) to increase
volume.
• Press the down button (-) to
decrease volume.
4
❈ The actual feature in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
The steering wheel audio remote
control button is installed to promote
safe driving.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
CDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK button is pressed for less
than 0.8 second, it will work as follows in each mode.
MUTE (4)
• Press the MUTE button to cancel
the sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to
activate the sound.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is described in the following
pages in this section.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION select buttons.
4-3
Multimedia System
ODM042327
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
Multimedia System
HOW VEHICLE AUDIO WORKS (FOR EUROPE)
FM reception
AM (MW, LW) reception
FM radio station
JBM001
JBM002
JBM003
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercepted
by the radio antenna on your vehicle.
This signal is then received by the radio
and sent to your vehicle speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures
the best possible quality reproduction.
However, in some cases the signal
coming to your vehicle may not be
strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as the
distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or
the presence of buildings, bridges or
other large obstructions in the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves
are transmitted at low frequencies.
These long, low frequency radio
waves can follow the curvature of the
earth rather than travelling straight out
into the atmosphere. In addition, they
curve around obstructions so that they
can provide better signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade at short distances from
the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains,
or other obstructions. These can
result in certain listening conditions
which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The
following conditions are normal and
do not indicate radio trouble:
4-4
Using a cellular phone or a
two-way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with the
audio equipment. In such a case, use
the cellular phone at a place as far as
possible from the audio equipment.
JBM005
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful
signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several
directions can cause distortion or
fluttering. This can be caused by a
direct and reflected signal from the
same station, or by signals from
two stations with close frequencies.
If this occurs, select another station
until the condition has passed.
4
CAUTION
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle, a
separate external antenna must
be fitted. When a cellular phone
or a radio set is used with an
internal antenna alone, it may
interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect
safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
4-5
Multimedia System
JBM004
Multimedia System
CARING FOR DISC
• If the temperature inside the car is
too high, open the car windows to
ventilate before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permission.
Use CDs that are created only by
lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners and magnetic sprays made for
analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from getting damaged, hold CDs by the
edges or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe it
from the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper.
• Make certain only CDs are inserted
into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
4-6
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CDRW CDs, certain CDs may not operate normally according to manufacturing companies or making and
recording methods. In such circumstances, continued use may cause
malfunctions to your audio system.
✽ NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy
Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a
copy protected CD may indicate
that the CD is defective, not the CD
player.
✽ NOTICE
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order :
to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
❈ If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
WARNING
• Do not stare at the screen
(Continued)
• Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
4-7
4
Multimedia System
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound
can be heard as these signs
may indicate product malfunction. Continued use in such
conditions could lead to accidents(fires, electric shock) or
product malfunctions.
• Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.
• Do not stop or park in parking-restricted areas to operate
the product. Such acts could
lead to traffic accidents.
• Use the system with the vehicle ignition turned on.
Prolonged use with the ignition turned off could result in
battery discharge.
(Continued)
Multimedia System
CAUTION
• Operating the device while
driving could lead to accidents due to a lack of attention
to external surroundings. First
park the vehicle before operating the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels
that allow the driver to hear
sounds from outside of the
vehicle. Driving in a state
where external sounds cannot
be heard may lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume
setting when turning the
device on. A sudden output of
extreme volume upon turning
the device on could lead to
hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)
(Continued)
4-8
(Continued)
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not operate the audio system for long
periods of time with the ignition
turned off as such operations
may lead to battery discharge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage
to the LCD or touch screen.
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
device and use a dry and
smooth cloth. Never use tough
materials, chemical cloths, or
solvents (alcohol, benzene,
thinners, etc.) as such materials may damage the device
panel or cause color/quality
deterioration
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
• In case of product malfunction, please contact your place
of purchase or After Service
center.
• Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.
• Prevent caustic solutions such
as perfume and cosmetic oil
from contacting the dashboard
because they may cause damage or discoloration.
✽ NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB
mode, the external USB device can
be damaged or may malfunction.
Therefore, disconnect the external
USB device when the audio is
turned off or in another mode.
(e.g, Radio, CD)
• Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or
the type of the files stored in the
device, there is a difference in the
time taken for recognition of the
device.
• Do not use the USB device for purposes other than playing music
files.
• Playing videos through the USB is
not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)
4-9
4
Multimedia System
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• The System may not play inauthentic MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB device.
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is
not recognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Depending on the condition of the
external USB device, the connected external USB device can be
unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector setting of External USB device is not
either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,
then the device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact
with the human body or other
objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a short
period of time, it may break the
device.
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting
a USB device.
(Continued)
Multimedia System
(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by logical drives, only the music files on
the highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may
not be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported. (istick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB)
can be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
4-10
(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on
a personal storage device.
• Please avoid using USB
memory
products
which can be used as
key chains or cellular
phone accessories as
they could cause damage to the
USB jack. Please make certain
only to use plug type connector
products.
✽ NOTICE - USING THE iPod®
DEVICE
(Continued)
• When connecting iPod® with the
iPod® Power Cable, insert the connector to the multimedia socket
completely. If not inserted completely, communications between
iPod® and audio may be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of the iPod® and the audio system,
the sound effects of both devices
will overlap and might reduce or
distort the quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod® when adjusting the audio system’s volume, and
turn off the equalizer of the audio
system when using the equalizer of
an iPod®.
• When not using iPod® with car
audio, detach the iPod® cable from
iPod®. Otherwise, iPod® may
remain in accessory mode, and
may not work properly.
4-11
4
Multimedia System
• Some iPod® models may not support communication protocol and
files may not properly play.
Supported iPod® models:
- iPod® Mini
- iPod® 4th (Photo) ~ 6th (Classic)
generation
- iPod® Nano 1st~4th generation
- iPod® Touch 1st~2nd generation
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod® can be different
from the order searched in the
audio system.
• If the iPod® disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the iPod®.
(Reset: Refer to iPod® manual)
• An iPod® may not operate normally on low battery.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some iPod® devices, such as the
iPhone®, can be connected through
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
interface. The device must have
audio
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology capability (such as for
stereo headphone Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology). The device
can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.
• To use iPod® features within the
audio, use the cable provided upon
purchasing an iPod®d device.
• Skipping or improper operation may
occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod®/iPhone® device.
• If your iPhone® is connected to both
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
and USB, the sound may not be properly played. In your iPhone®, select
the Dock connector or Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology to change the
sound output (source).
(Continued)
Multimedia System
■ CD
Player (for RDS model) : AC200TMEE, AC210TMEE
❋ No
4-12
logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
■ CD
Player : AC100TMEG, AC110TMEG, AC100TMEE, AC110TMEE
4
Multimedia System
❋ No
logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
4-13
Multimedia System
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND FUNCTIONS (FOR RDS MODEL)
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
(For RDS model)
2. RADIO
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ AM ➟ AMA.
3. MEDIA
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
1.
(EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
4-14
4. PHONE (if equipped)
• Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
SEEK
5. TRACK
• Radio Mode : Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Moves to next or previous song (file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.
6. PWR/VOL knob
•
Power Knob: Turns power
On/Off by pressing the knob
•
Volume Knob: Sets volume by
turning the knob left/right
8.
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed (under 0.8 seconds), sets
screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟ Screen
Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
TA
11. MENU
Displays menus for the current
mode.
❈ iPod® List : Move to parent category
PTY
12. FOLDER
• FM : RDS Program Type Search
• CD MP3, USB mode : Folder
Search
4-15
4
Multimedia System
7. 1 ~ 6 (Preset)
• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved frequencies (channels)
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode
1
- RPT
: Repeat
2
- RDM
: Random
• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
9. SCAN
• Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key (under
0.8seconds): TA On/Off
- Press and hold the key (over
0.8seconds): Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds each.
• Media mode
- Press and hold the key (over
0.8seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each.
❈ Press and holding the key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
SETUP
10. CLOCK
• Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Moves to the Display,
Sound, Clock, Phone, System setting modes
• Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Move to the Time setting
screen
Multimedia System
13.
TUNE knob
• Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:
Searches .songs (files) by turning
the knob left/right
❈ When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus
14. FM
• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ FMA.
15. AM
• Changes to AM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of AM ➟
AMA.
4-16
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND FUNCTIONS
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
2. RADIO
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM.
1.
(EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
4. PHONE (if equipped)
• Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
6. PWR/VOL knob
•
Power Knob: Turns power On/Off
by pressing the knob
•
Volume Knob: Sets volume by
turning the knob left/right
4-17
4
Multimedia System
3. MEDIA
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio mode.
SEEK
5. TRACK
• Radio Mode : Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Moves to next or previous song (file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.
Multimedia System
8.
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed (under 0.8 seconds), sets
screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟ Screen
Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
7. 1 ~ 6 (Preset)
• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved frequencies (channels)
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode
1
- RPT
: Repeat
2
- RDM
: Random
• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
4-18
9. SCAN
• Radio Mode
- Press the key (under 0.8 seconds): Previews each broadcast
for 5 seconds each
• CD, USB, My Music mode
- Press the key (under 0.8 seconds): Previews each song (file)
for 10 seconds each
❈ Press the key again to continue
listening to the current song (file).
SETUP
10. CLOCK
• Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Moves to the Display,
Sound, Clock, Phone, System setting modes
• Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Move to the Time setting
screen
11. MENU
Displays menus for the current
mode.
❈ iPod® List : Move to parent category
12. FOLDER
• CD MP3, USB mode : Folder
Search
13.
TUNE knob
• Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning
the knob left/right
❈ When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus
4
Multimedia System
14. FM
• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2.
15. AM
• Changes to AM mode.
4-19
Multimedia System
SETUP (FOR RDS MODEL) - AC200TMEE, AC210TMEE
Display Settings
SETUP
Press the
key Select
CLOCK
[Display] through
TUNE knob or
1
key Select menu through
RPT
TUNE knob
4-20
Mode Pop up
Scroll text
On .
[Mode Pop up] Changes
selection mode
• During On state, press the RADIO
or MEDIA key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
• When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or
1
6
keys
~
to select the
desired mode.
[Scroll text] Set On / Off
• On : Maintains scroll
• Off : Scrolls only one (1) time.
Song Info
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
Sound Settings
SETUP
Press the
key Select
CLOCK
[Sound] through
TUNE knob or
2
key Select menu through
RDM
TUNE knob
Audio Settings
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Audio Settings]
Select
menu through
TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob left/right to set
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
in 4 levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of
TUNE knob
4
Multimedia System
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values,
re-pressing the
TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Speed Dependent Volume
Control
4-21
Multimedia System
Clock Settings
SETUP
CLOCK
Press the
key Select
[Clock] through
TUNE knob or
3
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
4-22
Clock Settings
Day Settings
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
This menu is used to set the date.
Select [Day Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press
TUNE knob
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to set the [hour] and press
the tune knob to set the [minute].
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to make the settings and
press the tune knob to move to the
next setting. (Set in order of
Year/Month/Day)
Time Format
Automatic RDS Time
This function is used to set the 12/24
hour time format of the audio system.
Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr /
24Hr through
TUNE knob
This option is used to automatically
set the time by synchronizing with
RDS.
Select [Automatic RDS Time] Set
On / Off through
TUNE knob
• On : Turn on Automatic Time
• Off : Turn off.
Clock Display when Power is
OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set
On / Off through
TUNE knob
On
•
: Displays time/date on screen
• Off : Turn off.
4
Multimedia System
4-23
Multimedia System
System Settings
Press the
SETUP
CLOCK
key Select [System]
Memory Information
(if equipped)
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is displayed on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through
TUNE knob
❈ The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈ Language support by region
-
4-24
SETUP - AC100TMEG, AC110TMEG, AC100TMEE, AC110TMEE
Display Settings
SETUP
CLOCK
Press the
key Select
[Display] through
TUNE knob or
1
key Select menu through
RPT
TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
Song Info
On .
[Mode Pop up] Changes
selection mode
• During On state, press the RADIO
or MEDIA key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
• When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or
1
6
keys
~
to select the
desired mode.
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
4
Multimedia System
Scroll text
[Scroll text] Set On / Off
• On : Maintains scroll
• Off : Scrolls only one (1) time.
4-25
Multimedia System
Sound Settings
SETUP
Press the
key Select
CLOCK
[Sound] through
TUNE knob or
2
key Select menu through
RDM
TUNE knob
Audio setting
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Sound Settings] Select
menu through
TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values,
re-pressing the
TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
4-26
Speed Dependent Volume
Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
in 4 levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of
TUNE knob
Clock Settings
SETUP
CLOCK
Press the
key Select
[Clock] through
TUNE knob or
3
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
Clock Settings
Time Format
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
This function is used to set the 12/24
hour time format of the audio system.
Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr /
24Hr through
TUNE knob
Clock Display when Power is
OFF
Day Settings
This menu is used to set the date.
Select [Day Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press
TUNE knob
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to make the settings and
press the tune knob to move to the
next setting. (Set in order of
Year/Month/Day)
4-27
4
Multimedia System
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to set the [hour] and press
the tune knob to set the [minute].
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set
On / Off through
TUNE knob
On
•
: Displays time/date on screen
• Off : Turn off.
Multimedia System
Phone Setup (if equipped)
Press the
SETUP
CLOCK
key Select [Phone]
Press the
SETUP
CLOCK
(for RDS model)
key Select [Phone]
Pair Phone
CAUTION
To pair a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology enabled mobile
phone, authentication and connection processes are first
required. As a result, you cannot pair your mobile phone
while driving the vehicle. First
park your vehicle before use.
Select [Pair Phone] Set through
TUNE knob
➀ Search for device names as displayed on your mobile phone and
connect.
➁ Input the passkey displayed on the
screen. (Passkey : 0000)
❈ The device name and passkey will
be displayed on the screen for up
to 3 minutes. If pairing is not completed within the 3 minutes, the
mobile phone pairing process will
automatically be canceled.
4-28
➂ Pairing completion is displayed.
❈ In some mobile phones, pairing
will automatically be followed by
connection.
❈ It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phones.
Phone List
The names of up to 5 paired phones
will be displayed.
4
➀ Select a mobile phone that is not
currently connected.
➁ Connect the selected mobile
phone.
➂ Connection completion is displayed.
❈ If a phone is already connected,
disconnect the currently connected phone and select a new phone
to connect.
4-29
Multimedia System
A [ ] is displayed in front of the currently connected phone.
Select the desired name to setup the
selected phone.
• Connecting a phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through
TUNE knob
Select [Connect Phone]
Multimedia System
• Disconnecting a connected phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through
TUNE knob
Select [Disconnect Phone]
➀ Select the currently connected
mobile phone.
➁ Disconnect the selected mobile
phone.
➂ Disconnection completion is displayed.
4-30
• Changing connection sequence
(Priority)
This is used to change the order (priority) of automatic connection for the
paired mobile phones.
Select [Phone List] Select [Priority]
through
TUNE knob Select No. 1
Priority mobile phone
➀ Select [Priority].
➁ From the paired phones, select
the phone desired for No.1 priority.
➂ The changed priority sequence is
displayed.
❈ Once the connection sequence
(priority) is changed, the new no. 1
priority mobile phone will be connected.
- when the no. 1 priority cannot be
connected: Automatically attempts
to connect the most recently connected phone.
- Cases when the most recently
connected phone cannot be connected: Attempts to connect in the
order in which paired phones are
listed.
- The connected phone will automatically be changed to No. 1 priority.
• Delete
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through
TUNE knob
Select [Delete]
➀ Select the desired mobile phone.
➁ Delete the selected mobile phone.
➂ Deletion completion is displayed.
❈ When attempting to delete a currently connected phone, the
phone is first disconnected.
CAUTION
• When you delete a mobile
phone, the mobile phone contacts will also be erased.
• For stable Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology communication,
delete the mobile phone from
the audio and also delete the
audio from your mobile phone.
Contacts Download
This feature is used to download
contacts and call histories into the
audio system.
Select [Contacts Download] Select
through
TUNE knob
Phone book Download
(for RDS model)
This feature is used to download
phone book and call histories into
the audio system.
Select [Phone book Download]
Select through
TUNE knob.
Auto Download
When connecting a mobile phone, it
is possible to automatically download
new Contacts and Call Histories.
Select [Auto Download] Set On /
Off through
TUNE knob
CAUTION
• The download feature may not
4
• The download feature may not
be supported in some mobile
phones.
• If a different operation is performed while phone book is
being downloaded, downloading will be discontinued. Phone
book already downloaded will
be saved.
• When downloading new phone
book, delete all previously
saved phone book before starting download.
Multimedia System
be supported in some mobile
phones.
• If a different operation is performed while Contacts are
being downloaded, downloading will be discontinued.
Contacts already downloaded
will be saved.
• When downloading new
Contacts, delete all previously
saved Contacts before starting download.
CAUTION
4-31
Multimedia System
Audio Streaming
Outgoing Volume
Songs (files) saved in your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone can be played
through the audio system.
Select [Audio Streaming] Set On /
Off through
TUNE knob
This is used to set the volume of your
voice as heard by the other party
while on a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology enabled handsfree call.
Select [Outgoing Volume] Set volume through
TUNE knob
❈ While on a call, the volume can be
SEEK
changed by using the TRACK
key.
CAUTION
The
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology audio streaming
feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones.
4-32
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
System Off
This feature is used when you do not
wish to use the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology system.
Select [Bluetooth System Off] Set
through
TUNE knob
❈ If a phone is already connected,
disconnect the currently connected phone and turn the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology system off.
Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology System
To
use
Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology when the system is currently off, follow these next steps.
CAUTION
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
connection may become intermittently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these
next steps to try again.
1) Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology function within
the mobile phone ON/OFF
and try to connect again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power
ON/OFF and try to connect
again.
3) Completely
remove
the
mobile phone battery, reboot,
and then try to connect
again.
4) Reboot the audio system and
try to connect again
5) Delete all paired devices in
your mobile phone and the
audio system and pair again
for use.
4-33
4
Multimedia System
• Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology through the PHONE Key
Press the PHONE key Screen
Guidance
❈ Moves to the screen where
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
functions can be used and displays guidance.
• Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless
SETUP
Technology through the CLOCK
Key
SETUP
Press the
key Select
CLOCK
[Phone]
➀ A screen asking whether to turn on
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology will
be displayed.
➁ On the screen, select YES to turn
on Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
and display guidance.
Bluetooth® Wireless
❈ If
the
Technology system is turned on, the
system will automatically try to connect the most recently connected
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
Multimedia System
System Settings
Press the
[System]
SETUP
CLOCK
key Select
Memory Information
(if equipped)
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is displayed on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through
TUNE knob
❈ The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈ Language support by region
-
4-34
RADIO (FOR RDS MODEL)
Changing RADIO mode
SEEK
SEEK
Press the 1 ~ 6 key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from 1 ~ 6
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• AC200TMEE, AC210TMEE
- FM : Changes by 50KHz
- AM : Changes by 9khz
Traffic Announcement (TA)
TA
Shortly pressing the SCAN
key
(under 0.8 seconds): Set On / Off
TA Traffic Announcement) mode.
TA
Press the SCAN key
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): The broadcast frequency increases and previews
each broadcast for 5 seconds each.
After scanning all frequencies,
returns and plays the current
broadcast frequency.
PTY Up/Down
PTY
• Press the
key when
FOLDER
searching PTY in RDS Broadcasting
Program Type selection.
4-35
4
Multimedia System
Press the TRACK key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Automatically searches for the next frequency.
Preset SEEK
Multimedia System
MENU
Within MENU key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
AST (Auto Store)
Press the MENU key Set [ AST]
1
through
TUNE knob or RPT
key.
Select AST (Auto Store) to save frequencies with superior reception to
presets 1 ~ 6 . If no frequencies are received, then the most
recently received frequency will be
broadcast.
❈ Saves only to the Preset memory
1 ~ 6 of FMA or AMA mode.
4-36
AF (Alternative Frequency)
Press the MENU key Set [ AF]
2
through
TUNE knob or RDM
key.
The Alternative Frequency option
can be turned On/Off.
Region
Press the MENU key Set [
Region] through
TUNE knob or
3 key.
The Region option can be turned
On/Off.
News
Press the MENU key Set [ News]
through
TUNE knob or 4 key.
The News option can be turned
On/Off.
Info Volume
Info Volume refers to the sound volume upon receiving News or Traffic
information.
The info volume can be controlled by
turning the VOL knob left/right while
a news or traffic broadcast is playing.
❈ AF, Region, and News are RDS
Radio menus.
RADIO
Preset SEEK
SCAN
Changing RADIO mode
Press the 1 ~ 6 key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from 1 ~ 6
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
Press the SCAN key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequency increases and previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each.
After scanning all frequencies,
returns and plays the current
broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset 1 ~ 6
for 5 seconds each.
SEEK
SEEK
Press the TRACK
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Automatically searches for the next frequency.
4-37
4
Multimedia System
Changing RADIO mode
Multimedia System
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• AC100TMEE, AC110TMEE
- FM : Changes by 50KHz
- AM : Changes by 9khz
• AC100TMEG, AC110TMEG
- FM : Changes by 100KHz
- AM : Changes by 9khz
4-38
MENU
Within MENU key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
AST (Auto Store)
Press the MENU key Set [ AST]
1
through
TUNE knob or RPT
key.
Select AST (Auto Store) to save frequencies with superior reception to
presets 1 ~ 6 . If no frequencies are received, then the most
recently received frequency will be
broadcast.
BASIC METHOD OF USE : AUDIO CD / MP3 CD / USB / IPOD® / MY MUSIC
Repeat
Press the MEDIA key to change the
mod mode in order of CD ➟ USB(iPod®)
➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
<USB>
<My Music>
<CD MP3>
❈ The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted.
❈ The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
4-39
4
Multimedia System
<Audio CD>
1
While song (file) is playing RPT
(RPT) key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds)):
Repeats the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current
folder.
1
❈ Press the RPT
key again to turn
off repeat.
Multimedia System
Random
Changing Song/File
2
RDM
While song (file) is playing
(RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (Shortly pressing the key ):
Plays all songs in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (Shortly pressing
the key): Plays all files within the
current folder in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (pressing twice): Plays all
files in random order.
iPod® mode: RDM on screen
• Random (press the key) : Plays all
files in random order.
2
❈ Press the RDM
key again to turn
off random.
4-40
Scan (for RDS model)
SEEK
TRACK
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key: Plays the
current song from the beginning.
SEEK
❈ If the
key is pressed
TRACK
again within 1 second, the previous song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.
SEEK
While song (file) is playing TRACK
key
• Shortly pressing the key: Plays the
next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Fast forwards the
song.
TA
While song (file) is playing SCAN
key
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds) : Scans all songs for
10 seconds starting from the next
song.
TA
❈ Pressing and holding the SCAN
key again to turn off.
Scan
While song (file) is playing SCAN
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Scans all songs from
the next song for 10 seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not supported in iPod® mode.
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
While
FOLDER
file is playing
(Folder Up) key
PTY
FOLDER
MENU : Audio CD
/
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing
/ FOLDER (Folder Down) key
Press the CD MP3 mode
to set the Repeat,
Information features.
key
Random,
MENU
Information features.
PTY
FOLDER
Information
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key to display information of the current song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
4
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning
TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
• Pressing
TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
1
through the
TUNE knob or RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Multimedia System
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
the
TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.
Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
2
through the
TUNE knob or RDM
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
4-41
Multimedia System
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the CD MP3 mode MENU key
to set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Folder Repeat, All Random,
Information, and Copy features.
Information, and Copy features.
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
1
through the
TUNE knob or RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Folder Random
Press the MENU key Set [
F.RDM] through the TUNE knob or
2
key to randomly play songs
RDM
within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
4-42
Folder Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key to repeat songs within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Press the MENU key Set [
A.RDM] through the
TUNE knob
4
or
key to randomly play all
songs within the CD.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 5
key to display information of the current song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
Copy
Press the MENU key Set [ Copy]
through the
TUNE knob or 6
key.
This is used to copy the current
song into My Music. You can play
the copied Music in My Music
mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copying is canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
MENU : iPod®
Random
In iPod® mode, press the MENU
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
2
through the
TUNE knob or RDM
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
key to
set the Repeat, Random, Information
and Search features.
Information
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
4
Multimedia System
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
1
through the
TUNE knob or RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat
off.
Search
Press the MENU key Set [
Search] through the
TUNE knob
or 4 key.
Displays iPod® category list.
❈ Searching iPod® category is MENU
key pressed, move to parent category.
4-43
Multimedia System
MENU : My Music Mode
(if equipped)
In My Music mode, press the MENU
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
1
through the
TUNE knob or RPT
key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
4-44
Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
2
through the
TUNE knob or RDM
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random
off.
Information
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Press the MENU key Set [ Delete]
through the
TUNE knob or 4
key.
Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing
song.
Deletes file from list
➀ Select the file you wish to delete
by using the
TUNE knob.
MENU
➁ Press the
key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
Delete All
Press the MENU key Set [ Del.All]
through the
TUNE knob or 5
key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
✽ NOTICE - Using the My
Music
• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up to
1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in
the System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connected with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the MEDIA key to
change to AUX mode.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
✽ NOTICE - USING THE AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
4-45
4
Multimedia System
Delete Selection
Press the MENU key Set [
Del.Sel] through the
TUNE knob
or 6 key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀ Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.
➁ After selecting, press the MENU
key and select the delete menu.
Multimedia System
BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY AUDIO (IF EQUIPPED)
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology?
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-free
devices, stereo headsets, wireless
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology website at
www.Bluetooth.com
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks is under
license. Other trademarks and trade
names are those of their respective
owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell
phone is required to use Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned On.
❈ Setting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio Streaming :
SETUP
Press the CLOCK
key Select
[Phone] through the tune knob
Select [Audio Streaming] through
the TUNE knob Set On / Off
Starting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the MEDIA key to change the
mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX
➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Pause
Press the
TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈ The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
4-46
Phone (if equipped)
®
Before using the Bluetooth Wireless
Technology phone features
1. VOLUME button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
2.MUTE button : Mute the microphone during a call.
3.
button : Places and transfers
calls.
4.
button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
• Check call history and making call
➀ Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds)
the
key on the steering
remote controller.
➁ The call history list will be displayed on the screen.
➂ Press the
key again to connect a call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)
the
key on the steering
remote controller.
➁ The most recently called number
is redialed.
4-47
4
Multimedia System
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you
do not want automatic Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone connection, set the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology power to OFF.
Making a call using the Steering
wheel remote controller
Multimedia System
Phone MENU (for RDS model)
Press the PHONE key to display three
menus (Call History, Phone Book,
Phone Setup).
Call history
Press the PHONE key Set [
History] through the
TUNE knob
1
or RPT
key.
The call history is displayed and can
be used to select a number and
make a call.
If call history does not exist, a screen
asking whether to download call history is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported in some
mobile phones)
4-48
Phone Book
Press the PHONE key Set [ P.
Book] through the
TUNE knob or
2
key.
RDM
The phone book is displayed and
can be used to select a number and
make a call.
❈ If more than one number is saved
to one contact, then a screen
showing the mobile phone number, Home and office number is
displayed. Select the desired number to make the call.
❈ If phone book do not exist, a
screen asking whether to download phone book is displayed.
(The download feature may not be
supported in some mobile
phones)
Phone Setup
Press the PHONE key Set [ Setup]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key.
The Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
mobile phone setup screen is displayed. For more information, refer to
“Phone Setup”.
Phone MENU
Press the PHONE key to display three
menus (Call History, Contacts,
Phone Setup).
Phone Setup
Press the PHONE key Set [
Setup] through the
TUNE knob or
3
key.
The Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
mobile phone setup screen is displayed. For more information, refer to
“Phone Setup”.
4
Multimedia System
Call history
Press the PHONE key Set [
History] through the
TUNE knob
1
or RPT
key.
The call history is displayed and can
be used to select a number and
make a call.
If call history does not exist, a screen
asking whether to download call history is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported in some
mobile phones)
Contacts
Press the PHONE key Set [
Contacts] through the
TUNE knob
2
or RDM
key.
The Contacts are displayed and can
be used to select a number and
make a call.
❈ If more than one number is saved
to one contact, then a screen
showing the mobile phone number, Home and office number is
displayed. Select the desired number to make the call.
❈ If Contacts do not exist, a screen
asking whether to download
Contacts is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones)
4-49
Multimedia System
✽ NOTICE - USING THE
•
•
•
•
•
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
CELLULAR PHONE
Do not use a cellular phone or perform
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology settings (e.g. pairing a
phone) while driving.
Some
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology -enabled phones may
not be recognized by the system or
fully compatible with the system.
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features of the
audio system, refer your phone’s
User’s Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
operations.
The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology related features.
You will not be able to use the
hands-free feature when your
phone (in the car) is outside of the
cellular service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a underground, in a mountainous area, etc.).
(Continued)
4-50
(Continued)
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is too
loud, it may be difficult to hear the
other person’s voice during a call.
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects, otherwise
communications with Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology system or cellular service stations can be disturbed.
• While a phone is connected
through Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology your phone may discharge quicker than usual for
additional Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology-related operations.
• Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference
noise or malfunction to audio system. In this case, store the device
in a different location may resolve
the condition.
• Phone contact names should be
saved in English or they may not
be displayed correctly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition(IGN/ACC
ON),
the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically connected.
Even if you are outside, the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity
of the vehicle.
If you do not want automatic
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
connection, turn the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology feature off.
• The hands-free call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone type.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
features can be used only when the
mobile phone has been paired and
connected with the device. For
more information on pairing and
connecting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology
enabled
mobile
phones, refer to the “Phone Setup”
section.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In some mobile phones, starting
the ignition while talking through
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call will result
in the call becoming disconnected.
(Switch the call back to your
mobile phone when starting the
ignition.)
• Some features may not be supported in some Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
and devices.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled operation may be unstable depending on the communication state.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
4
Multimedia System
(Continued)
• When a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology mobile phone is connected, a ( ) icon will appear at
the top of the screen. If a ( ) icon
is not displayed, this indicates that
a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled device has not been connected. You must connect the
device before use. For more information on Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology mobile phones, refer
to the “Phone Setup” section.
• Pairing and connecting a
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone will work
only when the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology option within your
mobile phone has been turned on.
(Methods of turning on the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled feature may differ
depending on the mobile phone.)
(Continued)
4-51
Multimedia System
APPENDIX
Name
Description
AST (A.store)
Automatically selects and saves channels
SDVC
Speed Dependent Volume Control
4-52
HOW VEHICLE AUDIO WORKS (EXCEPT EUROPE)
FM reception
AM (MW, LW) reception
FM radio station
JBM002
JBM003
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around
your city. They are intercepted by the
radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then received by the radio and
sent to your vehicle speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures
the best possible quality reproduction.
However, in some cases the signal
coming to your vehicle may not be
strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as the
distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or
the presence of buildings, bridges or
other large obstructions in the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long, low frequency
radio waves can follow the curvature
of the earth rather than travelling
straight out into the atmosphere. In
addition, they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better
signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade at short distances from
the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains,
or other obstructions. These can
result in certain listening conditions
which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The
following conditions are normal and
do not indicate radio trouble:
4-53
4
Multimedia System
JBM001
Multimedia System
Using a cellular phone or a
two-way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with the
audio equipment. In such a case, use
the cellular phone at a place as far as
possible from the audio equipment.
JBM004
JBM005
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful
signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from several directions can cause distortion
or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
4-54
CAUTION
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle,
a separate external antenna
must be fitted. When a cellular
phone or a radio set is used
with an internal antenna alone,
it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and
adversely affect safe operation
of the vehicle.
WARNING
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
CARING FOR DISC
• Depending on the type of CDR/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may
not operate normally according to
manufacturing companies or making and recording methods. In such
circumstances, continued use may
cause malfunctions to your audio
system.
✽ NOTICE
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order :
to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
❈ If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
✽ NOTICE - Playing an
4
Incompatible Copy
Protected Audio CD
Multimedia System
• If the temperature inside the car is
too high, open the car windows to
ventilate before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permission. Use CDs that are created
only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such
as benzene and thinner, normal
cleaners and magnetic sprays
made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from
getting damaged, hold CDs by the
edges or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe
it from the center to the outside
edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper.
• Make certain only CDs are inserted into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use
to protect them from scratches or
dirt.
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a
copy protected CD may indicate
that the CD is defective, not the CD
player.
4-55
Multimedia System
WARNING
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.
• Heed caution not to spill water
or introduce foreign objects
into the device. Such acts
could lead to smoke, fire, or
product malfunction.
(Continued)
4-56
(Continued)
• Please refrain from use if the
screen is blank or no sound
can be heard as these signs
may indicate product malfunction. Continued use in such
conditions could lead to accidents(fires, electric shock) or
product malfunctions.
• Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.
• Do not stop or park in parking-restricted areas to operate
the product. Such acts could
lead to traffic accidents.
• Use the system with the vehicle ignition turned on.
Prolonged use with the ignition turned off could result in
battery discharge.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
CAUTION
• Operating the device while
(Continued)
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
• In case of product malfunction, please contact your place
of purchase or After Service
center.
• Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.
• Prevent caustic solutions such
as perfume and cosmetic oil
from contacting the dashboard
because they may cause damage or discoloration.
4-57
4
Multimedia System
driving could lead to accidents due to a lack of attention
to external surroundings. First
park the vehicle before operating the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels
that allow the driver to hear
sounds from outside of the
vehicle. Driving in a state
where external sounds cannot
be heard may lead to accidents.
• Pay attention to the volume
setting when turning the
device on. A sudden output of
extreme volume upon turning
the device on could lead to
hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Turn on the car ignition before
using this device. Do not operate the audio system for long
periods of time with the ignition
turned off as such operations
may lead to battery discharge.
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage
to the LCD or touch screen.
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
device and use a dry and
smooth cloth. Never use tough
materials, chemical cloths, or
solvents (alcohol, benzene,
thinners, etc.) as such materials may damage the device
panel or cause color/quality
deterioration
(Continued)
Multimedia System
✽ NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• The System may not play inauthentic MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB device.
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is
not recognizable.
(Continued)
4-58
(Continued)
• Depending on the condition of the
external USB device, the connected external USB device can be
unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not
either
512BYTE
or
2048BYTE, then the device will
not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact
with the human body or other
objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a short
period of time, it may break the
device.
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting
a USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB
mode, the external USB device can
be damaged or may malfunction.
Therefore, disconnect the external
USB device when the audio is
turned off or in another mode.
(e.g, Radio, CD)
• Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or
the type of the files stored in the
device, there is a difference in the
time taken for recognition of the
device.
• Do not use the USB device for purposes other than playing music
files.
• Playing videos through the USB is
not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on
a personal storage device.
• Please avoid using USB
memory
products
which can be used as
key chains or cellular
phone accessories as
they could cause damage to the
USB jack. Please make certain
only to use plug type connector
products.
4
Multimedia System
(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by logical drives, only the music files on
the highest-priority drive are recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may
not be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported. (istick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB)
can be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
4-59
Multimedia System
✽ NOTICE - USING THE iPod®
DEVICE
• Some iPod® models may not support communication protocol and
files may not properly play.
Supported iPod® models:
- iPod® Mini
- iPod® 4th (Photo) ~ 6th (Classic)
generation
- iPod® Nano 1st~4th generation
- iPod® Touch 1st~2nd generation
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod® can be different
from the order searched in the
audio system.
• If the iPod® disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the iPod®.
(Reset: Refer to iPod® manual)
• An iPod® may not operate normally on low battery.
(Continued)
4-60
(Continued)
• Some iPod® devices, such as the
iPhone®, can be connected through
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
interface. The device must have
audio
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology capability (such as for
stereo headphone Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology ). The device
can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.
• To use iPod® features within the
audio, use the cable provided upon
purchasing an iPod®d device.
• Skipping or improper operation may
occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod®/iPhone® device.
• If your iPhone® is connected to both
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
and USB, the sound may not be properly played. In your iPhone®, select
the Dock connector or Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology to change the
sound output (source).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When connecting iPod® with the
iPod® Power Cable, insert the connector to the multimedia socket
completely. If not inserted completely, communications between
iPod® and audio may be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of the iPod® and the audio system,
the sound effects of both devices
will overlap and might reduce or
distort the quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod® when adjusting the audio system’s volume, and
turn off the equalizer of the audio
system when using the equalizer of
an iPod®.
• When not using iPod® with car
audio, detach the iPod® cable from
iPod®. Otherwise, iPod® may
remain in accessory mode, and
may not work properly.
■ CD
Player : AC100TMGG, AC110TMGG, AC100TMGE, AC110TMGE, AC100TMGN, AC110TMGN,
AC100TMGL*, AC110TMGL*
4
Multimedia System
* : for columbia
❈ No
logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
4-61
Multimedia System
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND FUNCTIONS
❈ Display and settings may differ
depending on the selected audio.
Audio Head Unit
2. RADIO
• Changes to FM/AM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM.
3. MEDIA
• Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio mode.
1.
(EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
4-62
4. PHONE (if equipped)
• Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
SEEK
5. TRACK
• Radio Mode : Automatically searches for broadcast frequencies.
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Moves to next or previous song (file)
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the current song.
6. PWR/VOL knob
•
Power Knob: Turns power On/Off
by pressing the knob
•
Volume Knob: Sets volume by
turning the knob left/right
8. DISP
• Each time the button is shortly
pressed (under 0.8 seconds), sets
screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟ Screen
Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
SETUP
10. CLOCK
• Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Moves to the Display,
Sound, Clock, Phone, System setting modes
• Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds) : Move to the Time setting
screen
11. MENU
Displays menus for the current
mode.
❈ iPod® List : Move to parent category
12. FOLDER
• CD MP3, USB mode : Folder
Search
4-63
4
Multimedia System
7. 1 ~ 6 (Preset)
• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved frequencies (channels)
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode
1
- RPT
: Repeat
2
- RDM
: Random
• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
9. SCAN
• Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews
each broadcast for 5 seconds
each.
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broad1
casts saved in Preset
~
6
for 5 seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
• CD, USB, My Music mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
Multimedia System
13.
TUNE knob
• Radio mode : Changes frequency
by turning the knob left/right
• CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning
the knob left/right
❈ When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the
song.
• Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus
14. FM
• Changes to FM mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2.
15. AM
• Changes to AM mode.
4-64
SETUP - AC100TMGG, AC110TMGG, AC100TMGE, AC110TMGE, AC100TMGN, AC110TMGN,
AC100TMGL*, AC110TMGL*
* : FOR COLUMBIA
Display Settings
SETUP
CLOCK
Press the
key Select
[Display] through
TUNE knob or
1
key Select menu through
RPT
TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
Media Display
On .
[Mode Pop up] Changes
selection mode
• During On state, press the RADIO
or MEDIA key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
• When the pop up screen is displayed, use the
TUNE knob or
1
6
keys
~
to select the
desired mode.
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
4
Multimedia System
Text Scroll
[Text Scroll ] Set On / Off
• On : Maintains scroll
• Off : Scrolls only one (1) time.
4-65
Multimedia System
Sound Settings
SETUP
Press the
key Select
CLOCK
[Sound] through
TUNE knob or
2
key Select menu through
RDM
TUNE knob
Audio Settings
This menu allows you to set the
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound
Fader and Balance.
Select [Sound Settings] Select
menu through
TUNE knob Turn
TUNE knob left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values,
re-pressing the
TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
4-66
Speed Dependent Volume
Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
in 4 levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of
TUNE knob
Clock Settings
SETUP
CLOCK
Press the
key Select
[Clock] through
TUNE knob or
3
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
Clock Settings
Calendar Settings
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
This menu is used to set the date.
Select [Calendar Settings] Set
through
TUNE knob Press
TUNE knob
4
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to make the settings and
press the tune knob to move to the
next setting. (Set in order of
Year/Month/Day)
Clock Display when Power is
OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set
On / Off through
TUNE knob
On
•
: Displays time/date on screen
• Off : Turn off.
4-67
Multimedia System
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to set the [hour] and press
the tune knob to set the [minute].
Multimedia System
Phone Setup (if eqipped)
Press the
SETUP
CLOCK
key Select [Phone]
Pair Phone
CAUTION
To pair a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology enabled mobile
phone, authentication and connection processes are first
required. As a result, you cannot pair your mobile phone
while driving the vehicle. First
park your vehicle before use.
Select [Pair Phone] Set through
TUNE knob
➀ Search for device names as displayed on your mobile phone and
connect.
➁ Input the passkey displayed on the
screen. (Passkey : 0000)
❈ The device name and passkey will
be displayed on the screen for up
to 3 minutes. If pairing is not completed within the 3 minutes, the
mobile phone pairing process will
automatically be canceled.
4-68
➂ Pairing completion is displayed.
❈ In some mobile phones, pairing
will automatically be followed by
connection.
❈ It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phones.
Phone List
The names of up to 5 paired phones
will be displayed.
• Disconnecting a connected phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through
TUNE knob
Select [Disconnect Phone]
➀ Select a mobile phone that is not
currently connected.
➁ Connect the selected mobile
phone.
➂ Connection completion is displayed.
❈ If a phone is already connected,
disconnect the currently connected phone and select a new phone
to connect.
➀ Select the currently connected
mobile phone.
➁ Disconnect the selected mobile
phone.
➂ Disconnection completion is displayed.
4-69
4
Multimedia System
A [ ] is displayed in front of the currently connected phone.
Select the desired name to setup the
selected phone.
• Connecting a phone
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through
TUNE knob
Select [Connect Phone]
Multimedia System
• Changing connection sequence
(Priority)
This is used to change the order (priority) of automatic connection for the
paired mobile phones.
Select [Phone List] Select [Priority]
through
TUNE knob Select No. 1
Priority mobile phone
➀ Select [Priority].
➁ From the paired phones, select
the phone desired for No.1 priority.
➂ The changed priority sequence is
displayed.
❈ Once the connection sequence
(priority) is changed, the new no. 1
priority mobile phone will be connected.
- when the no. 1 priority cannot be
connected: Automatically attempts
to connect the most recently connected phone.
- Cases when the most recently
connected phone cannot be connected: Attempts to connect in the
order in which paired phones are
listed.
4-70
- The connected phone will automatically be changed to No. 1 priority.
• Delete
Select [Phone List] Select mobile
phone through
TUNE knob
Select [Delete]
➀ Select the desired mobile phone.
➁ Delete the selected mobile phone.
➂ Deletion completion is displayed.
❈ When attempting to delete a currently connected phone, the
phone is first disconnected.
CAUTION
• When you delete a mobile
phone, the mobile phone contacts will also be erased.
• For stable Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology communication,
delete the mobile phone from
the audio and also delete the
audio from your mobile phone.
Contacts Download
This feature is used to download
contacts and call histories into the
audio system.
Select [Contacts Download] Select
through
TUNE knob
CAUTION
• The download feature may not
be supported in some mobile
phones.
• If a different operation is performed while Contacts are
being downloaded, downloading will be discontinued.
Contacts already downloaded
will be saved.
• When downloading new
Contacts, delete all previously
saved Contacts before starting download.
Auto Download
Audio Streaming
Outgoing Volume
When connecting a mobile phone, it
is possible to automatically download
new Contacts and Call Histories.
Select [Auto Download] Set On /
Off through
TUNE knob
Songs (files) saved in your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone can be played
through the audio system.
Select [Audio Streaming] Set On /
Off through
TUNE knob
This is used to set the volume of your
voice as heard by the other party
while on a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology enabled handsfree call.
Select [Outgoing Volume] Set volume through
TUNE knob
❈ While on a call, the volume can be
SEEK
changed by using the
TRACK
key.
CAUTION
4
Multimedia System
The
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology audio streaming
feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones.
4-71
Multimedia System
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
System Off
This feature is used when you do not
wish to use the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology system.
Select [Bluetooth System Off] Set
through
TUNE knob
❈ If a phone is already connected,
disconnect the currently connected phone and turn the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology system off.
Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology System
To
use
Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology when the system is currently off, follow these next steps.
• Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology through the PHONE Key
Press the PHONE key Screen
Guidance
❈ Moves to the screen where
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
functions can be used and displays guidance.
4-72
• Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless
SETUP
Technology through the CLOCK
Key
SETUP
Press the CLOCK
key Select [Phone]
➀ A screen asking whether to turn on
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology will
be displayed.
➁ On the screen, select YES to turn
on Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
and display guidance.
Bluetooth® Wireless
❈ If
the
Technology system is turned on, the
system will automatically try to connect the most recently connected
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
CAUTION
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
connection may become intermittently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these
next steps to try again.
1) Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology function within the
mobile phone ON/OFF and try
to connect again.
2) Turn the mobile phone power
ON/OFF and try to connect
again.
3) Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
try to connect again.
4) Reboot the audio system and
try to connect again
5) Delete all paired devices in
your mobile phone and the
audio system and pair again
for use.
System Settings
Press the
SETUP
CLOCK
key Select [System]
Memory Information
(if equipped)
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is displayed on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through
TUNE knob
4
4-73
Multimedia System
❈ The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈ Language support by region
- English,
Multimedia System
RADIO
Changing RADIO mode
Preset SEEK
SCAN
Changing RADIO mode
Press the 1 ~ 6 key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from 1 ~ 6
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
Press the SCAN key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequency increases and previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each.
After scanning all frequencies,
returns and plays the current
broadcast frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset 1 ~ 6
for 5 seconds each.
SEEK
SEEK
Press the TRACK
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Changes the frequency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Automatically searches for the next frequency.
4-74
Selecting through manual
search
Within MENU key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
4
A.Store (Auto Store)
Press the MENU key Set [
A.Store] through
TUNE knob or
1
key.
RPT
Select A.Store(Auto Store) to save
frequencies with superior reception
to presets 1 ~ 6 . If no frequencies are received, then the most
recently received frequency will be
broadcast.
Multimedia System
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
• AC100TMGE, AC110TMGE
- FM : Changes by 50KHz
- AM : Changes by 9khz
• AC100TMGG, AC110TMGG
- FM : Changes by 100KHz
- AM : Changes by 9khz
• AC100TMGL, AC110TMGL
- FM : Changes by 100KHz
- AM : Changes by 10khz
• AC100TMGN, AC110TMGN
- FM : Changes by 200KHz
- AM : Changes by 10khz
MENU
4-75
Multimedia System
BASIC METHOD OF USE : Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB / iPod® / My Music
Repeat
Press the MEDIA key to change the
mod mode in order of CD ➟ USB(iPod®)
➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
<USB>
<Audio CD>
<My Music>
<CD MP3>
4-76
❈ The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted.
❈ The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
1
While song (file) is playing RPT
(RPT) key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds)):
Repeats the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current
folder.
1
❈ Press the RPT
key again to turn
off repeat.
Random
Changing Song/File
2
RDM
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key: Plays the
current song from the beginning.
SEEK
❈ If the
key is pressed
TRACK
again within 1 second, the previous song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.
SEEK
While song (file) is playing TRACK
key
• Shortly pressing the key: Plays the
next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Fast forwards the
song.
While song (file) is playing SCAN
key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds) : Scans all songs from
the next song for 10 seconds each.
❈ Press the SCAN key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not supported in iPod® mode.
4
Multimedia System
While song (file) is playing
(RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (Shortly pressing the key ):
Plays all songs in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (Shortly pressing
the key): Plays all files within the
current folder in random order.
MP3 CD, USB mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (pressing twice): Plays all
files in random order.
iPod® mode: RDM on screen
• Random (press the key) : Plays all
files in random order.
2
❈ Press the RDM
key again to turn
off random.
Scan
SEEK
TRACK
4-77
Multimedia System
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
While file is
(Folder Up) key
playing
FOLDER
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing
(Folder Down) key
Press the CD MP3 mode
to set the Repeat,
Information features.
key
Random,
MENU
Information features.
FOLDER
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
the
TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning
TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
• Pressing
TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).
4-78
Information
MENU : Audio CD
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
1
through the
TUNE knob or RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
2
through the
TUNE knob or RDM
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key to display information of the current song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the CD MP3 mode MENU key
to set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Folder Repeat, All Random,
Information, and Copy features.
Folder Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key to repeat songs within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
Information, and Copy features.
All Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
1
through the
TUNE knob or RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Folder Random
Press the MENU key Set [
F.RDM] through the TUNE knob or
2
key to randomly play songs
RDM
within the current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 5
key to display information of the current song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
4-79
4
Multimedia System
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [
A.RDM] through the
TUNE knob
4
or
key to randomly play all
songs within the CD.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Copy
Press the MENU key Set [ Copy]
through the
TUNE knob or 6
key.
This is used to copy the current
song into My Music. You can play
the copied Music in My Music
mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copying is canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
Multimedia System
MENU : iPod®
In iPod® mode, press the MENU
key to
set the Repeat, Random, Information
and Search features.
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
1
through the
TUNE knob or RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat
off.
4-80
Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
2
through the
TUNE knob or RDM
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
Search
Press the MENU key Set [
Search] through the
TUNE knob
or 4 key.
Displays iPod® category list.
❈ Searching iPod® category is MENU
key pressed, move to parent category.
MENU : My Music Mode
(if equipped)
In My Music mode, press the MENU
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.
Information
Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE knob or 3
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Press the MENU key Set [ Delete]
through the
TUNE knob or 4
key.
Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing
song.
Deletes file from list
4
➀ Select the file you wish to delete
by using the
TUNE knob.
MENU
➁ Press the
key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
4-81
Multimedia System
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
1
through the
TUNE knob or RPT
key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
2
through the
TUNE knob or RDM
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random
off.
Multimedia System
Delete All
Press the MENU key Set [ Del.All]
through the
TUNE knob or 5
key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection
Press the MENU key Set [
Del.Sel] through the
TUNE knob
or 6 key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀ Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.
➁ After selecting, press the MENU
key and select the delete menu.
4-82
✽ NOTICE - Using the My
Music
• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up to
1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in
the System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connected with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the MEDIA key to
change to AUX mode.
4
Multimedia System
❈ AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
✽ NOTICE - USING THE AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
4-83
Multimedia System
BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY AUDIO (IF EQUIPPED)
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology?
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-free
devices, stereo headsets, wireless
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology website at
www.Bluetooth.com
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
audio may not be supported
depending on the compatibility of
your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
mobile phone.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks is under
license. Other trademarks and trade
names are those of their respective
owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell
phone is required to use Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned On.
❈ Setting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio Streaming :
SETUP
Press the CLOCK
key Select
[Phone] through the tune knob
Select [Audio Streaming] through
the TUNE knob Set On / Off
Starting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the MEDIA key to change the
mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX
➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Pause
Press the
TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈ The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
4-84
Phone (if equipped)
Making a call using the Steering
wheel remote controller
Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone features
1. VOLUME button : Raises or lowers
speaker volume.
2.MUTE button : Mute the microphone during a call.
3.
button : Places and transfers
calls.
4.
button : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)
the
key on the steering
remote controller.
➁ The most recently called number
is redialed.
4-85
4
Multimedia System
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you
do not want automatic Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone connection, set the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology power to OFF.
• Check call history and making call
➀ Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds)
the
key on the steering
remote controller.
➁ The call history list will be displayed on the screen.
➂ Press the
key again to connect a call to the selected number.
Multimedia System
Phone MENU
Press the PHONE key to display three
menus (Call History, Contacts,
Phone Setup).
Call history
Press the PHONE key Set [
History] through the
TUNE knob
1
or RPT
key.
The call history is displayed and can
be used to select a number and
make a call.
If call history does not exist, a screen
asking whether to download call history is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported in some
mobile phones)
4-86
Contacts
Press the PHONE key Set [
Contacts] through the
TUNE knob
2
or RDM
key.
The Contacts are displayed and can
be used to select a number and
make a call.
❈ If more than one number is saved
to one contact, then a screen
showing the mobile phone number, Home and office number is
displayed. Select the desired number to make the call.
❈ If Contacts do not exist, a screen
asking whether to download
Contacts is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones)
Phone Setup
Press the PHONE key Set [
Setup] through the
TUNE knob or
3
key.
The Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
mobile phone setup screen is displayed. For more information, refer to
“Phone Setup”.
✽ NOTICE - USING THE
•
•
•
•
(Continued)
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is too
loud, it may be difficult to hear the
other person’s voice during a call.
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects, otherwise
communications with Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology system or cellular service stations can be disturbed.
• While a phone is connected
through Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology your phone may discharge quicker than usual for
additional Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology-related operations.
• Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference
noise or malfunction to audio system. In this case, store the device
in a different location may resolve
the condition.
• Phone contact names should be
saved in English or they may not
be displayed correctly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition(IGN/ACC
ON),
the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically connected.
Even if you are outside, the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity
of the vehicle.
If you do not want automatic
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
connection, turn the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology feature off.
• The hands-free call volume and
quality may differ depending on
the mobile phone type.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
features can be used only when the
mobile phone has been paired and
connected with the device. For
more information on pairing and
connecting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology
enabled
mobile
phones, refer to the “Phone Setup”
section.
(Continued)
4-87
4
Multimedia System
•
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
CELLULAR PHONE
Do not use a cellular phone or perform
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology settings (e.g. pairing a
phone) while driving.
Some
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology -enabled phones may
not be recognized by the system or
fully compatible with the system.
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features of the
audio system, refer your phone’s
User’s Manual for phone-side
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
operations.
The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology related features.
You will not be able to use the
hands-free feature when your
phone (in the car) is outside of the
cellular service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a underground, in a mountainous area, etc.).
(Continued)
Multimedia System
(Continued)
• When a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology mobile phone is connected, a ( ) icon will appear at
the top of the screen. If a ( ) icon
is not displayed, this indicates that
a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled device has not been connected. You must connect the
device before use. For more information on Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology mobile phones, refer
to the “Phone Setup” section.
• Pairing and connecting a
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled mobile phone will work
only when the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology option within your
mobile phone has been turned on.
(Methods of turning on the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled feature may differ
depending on the mobile phone.)
(Continued)
4-88
(Continued)
• In some mobile phones, starting
the ignition while talking through
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled handsfree call will result
in the call becoming disconnected.
(Switch the call back to your
mobile phone when starting the
ignition.)
• Some features may not be supported in some Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
and devices.
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
enabled operation may be unstable depending on the communication state.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
APPENDIX
Name
Description
AST (A.store)
Automatically selects and saves channels
SDVC
Speed Dependent Volume Control
4
Multimedia System
4-89
Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING ..................................................5-3
Good braking practices ................................................5-51
Before entering the vehicle ..........................................5-3
Before starting .................................................................5-3
DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM...................................5-52
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................5-5
Rear view camera ...........................................................5-52
Rear parking assist system ..........................................5-53
Key ignition switch .........................................................5-5
Engine Start/Stop button..............................................5-10
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................5-56
MANUAL TRANSAXLE ........................................5-19
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS..........................5-60
Manual transaxle operation ........................................5-19
Good driving practices ..................................................5-21
Hazardous driving conditions.......................................5-60
Rocking the vehicle ....................................................5-60
Smooth cornering ...........................................................5-61
Driving at night ................................................................5-61
Driving in the rain ...........................................................5-62
Driving in flooded areas................................................5-63
Reducing the risk of a rollover ...................................5-63
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE ..................................5-22
Automatic transaxle operation ...................................5-22
Parking...............................................................................5-28
Good driving practices ..................................................5-28
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) ...............................5-30
4WD operation .................................................................5-31
Emergency precautions.................................................5-35
BRAKING SYSTEM ..............................................5-37
Power brakes ..................................................................5-37
Disc brakes wear indicator ..........................................5-38
Parking brake ..................................................................5-38
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-41
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-43
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-47
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ...................................5-48
Downhill Brake Control (DBC) ......................................5-49
Cruise control operation................................................5-56
WINTER DRIVING .................................................5-64
Snow or icy conditions ..................................................5-64
Winter precaution ...........................................................5-67
TRAILER TOWING.................................................5-69
If you decide to pull a trailer?.....................................5-70
Trailer towing equipment ..............................................5-72
Driving with a trailer ......................................................5-73
Maintenance when towing a trailer ..........................5-77
VEHICLE WEIGHT .................................................5-78
Overloading.......................................................................5-78
5
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.
Do not inhale engine exhaust.
If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause
unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If
you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the
vehicle, we recommend that the exhaust system be checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only
long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.
Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle , be sure to do so only in an
open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
Keep the air intakes clear.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield
clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.
If you must drive with the tailgate open:
Close all windows.
Open instrument panel air vents.
Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.
5-2
BEFORE DRIVING
Before starting
• Be sure all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean
and unobstructed.
• Remove frost, snow, or ice.
• Visually check the tires for uneven
wear and damage.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
• Make sure the hood, the tailgate,
and the doors are securely closed
and locked.
• Adjust the position of the seat and
steering wheel.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Verify all the lights work.
• Fasten your seatbelt. Check that all
passengers have fastened their
seatbelts.
• Check the gauges and indicators in
the instrument panel and the messages on the instrument display
when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check that any items you are carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
All passengers must be properly belted whenever the vehicle is moving. For more information, refer to “Seat Belts” in
chapter 2.
• Always drive defensively.
Assume other drivers or
pedestrians may be careless
and make mistakes.
• Stay focused on the task of
driving. Driver distraction can
cause accidents.
• Leave plenty of space
between you and the vehicle
in front of you.
5-3
5
Driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
NEVER drink or take drugs and
drive.
Drinking or taking drugs and
driving is dangerous and may
result in an accident and SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH.
Drunk driving is the number
one contributor to the highway
death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Just one
drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions
and emergencies and your reaction time gets worse with each
additional drink.
Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous
or more dangerous than driving
under the influence of alcohol.
(Continued)
5-4
(Continued)
You are much more likely to
have a serious accident if you
drink or take drugs and drive. If
you are drinking or taking
drugs, don’t drive. Do not ride
with a driver who has been
drinking or taking drugs.
Choose a designated driver or
call a taxi.
IGNITION SWITCH
WARNING
(Continued)
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in 1st gear (for manual
transaxle vehicle) or P (Park, for
automatic transaxle vehicle)
position, apply the parking
brake, and turn ignition switch
to the LOCK position.
Unexpected vehicle movement
may occur if these precautions
are not followed.
OLMB053001
5
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:
• NEVER allow children or any
person who is unfamiliar with
the vehicle to touch the ignition switch or related parts.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur.
• NEVER reach through the
steering wheel for the ignition
switch, or any other control,
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area may cause a
loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
Key ignition switch
NEVER turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK or ACC position
while the vehicle is in motion
except in an emergency. This
will result in the engine turning
off and loss of power assist for
the steering and brake systems.
This may lead to loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.
(Continued)
5-5
Driving your vehicle
Key ignition switch positions
Switch
Position
LOCK
Action
To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the key in The steering wheel locks to protect the vehislightly at the ACC position and turn the key towards the LOCK posi- cle from theft. (if equipped)
tion.
The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.
Electrical accessories are usable.
ACC
Notes
The steering wheel unlocks.
If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition
switch to the ACC position, turn the key while
turning the steering wheel right and left to
release tension.
ON
This is the normal key position when the engine has started.
Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON
position when the engine is not running to
All features and accessories are usable.
prevent the battery from discharging.
The warning lights can be checked when you turn the ignition switch
from ACC to ON.
START
To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the START position. The engine will crack until you release the
The switch returns to the ON position when you let go of the key. key.
5-6
Starting the engine
WARNING
• Always
Vehicle with automatic transaxle:
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
3.Depress the brake pedal.
4.Turn the ignition switch to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
engine starts and release it.
5
Driving your vehicle
wear appropriate
shoes when operating your
vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as
high heels, ski boots, sandals,
flip-flops, etc., may interfere
with your ability to use the
brake, accelerator and clutch
pedals.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle can move and lead
to an accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is
normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake padel
is released when the rpm is
high.
Starting the gasoline engine
Vehicle with manual transaxle:
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.
3.Depress the clutch and brake pedals.
4.Turn the ignition switch to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
engine starts and release it.
5-7
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Starting the diesel engine
• Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate
engine speeds. (Steep accelerating
and decelerating should be avoided.)
• Always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while
starting the vehicle. Do not race
the engine while warming it up.
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated before starting the engine and
then have to be warmed up before
starting to drive.
Vehicle with manual transaxle:
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.
3.Depress the clutch and brake pedals.
4.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position to pre-heat the engine.
The glow indicator light (
) will
illuminate.
5.When the glow indicator light (
)
goes out, turn the key ignition
switch to the START position. Hold
the key (maximum of 10 seconds)
until the engine starts and release
it.
5-8
Vehicle with automatic transaxle:
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
3.Depress the brake pedal.
4.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position to pre-heat the engine.
The glow indicator light (
) will
illuminate.
5.When the glow indicator light (
)
goes out, turn the key ignition
switch to the START position. Hold
the key (maximum of 10 seconds)
until the engine starts and release
it.
✽ NOTICE
If the engine does not start within 10
seconds after preheating is completed, turn the ignition switch once
more to the LOCK position and wait
for 10 seconds. Then turn the ignition switch to the ON position in
order to preheat the engine again.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• Do not hold the ignition key in
the START position for more
than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10
seconds before trying again.
• Do not turn the ignition switch
to the START position with the
engine running. It may damage the starter.
• If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still
moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position
in an attempt to restart the
engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.
5-9
5
Driving your vehicle
Starting and stopping the engine
for turbocharger intercooler
1.Do not race or accelerate the
engine immediately after starting
the engine.
If the engine is cold, idle for several seconds before sufficient lubrication is ensured in the turbo
charger unit.
2.After high speed or extended driving that requires heavy engine
load, idle the engine about 1
minute before turning the engine
off.
This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to shutting
the engine off.
Driving your vehicle
Engine Start/Stop button
OLMB053004
Whenever the front door is opened,
the Engine Start/Stop button will illuminate and will go off 30 seconds
after the door is closed.
5-10
WARNING
To turn the engine off in an
emergency:
Press and hold the Engine
Start/Stop button for more than
two seconds OR Rapidly press
and
release
the
Engine
Start/Stop button three times
(within three seconds).
If the vehicle is still moving, you
can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by
pressing the Engine Start/Stop
button with the shift lever in the
N (Neutral) position.
WARNING
• NEVER press the Engine
Start/Stop button while the
vehicle is in motion except in
an emergency. This will result
in the engine turning off and
loss of power assist for the
steering and brake systems.
This may lead to loss of directional control and braking
function, which could cause
an accident.
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, set the parking
brake, press the Engine
Start/Stop button to the OFF
position, and take the Smart
Key with you. Unexpected
vehicle movement may occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
Engine Stop/Start button positions
- Vehicle with manual transaxle
Button Position
OFF
Action
Notes
To turn off the engine, stop the vehicle and If the steering wheel is not locked properly
then press the Engine Start/Stop button.
when you open the driver's door, the warning
The steering wheel locks to protect the vehi- chime will sound.
cle from theft.
5
Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the • If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
button is in the OFF position without depress- the ACC position for more than one hour, the
ing the clutch pedal.
battery power will turn off automatically to
prevent the battery from discharging.
Electrical accessories are usable.
•
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly,
The steering wheel unlocks.
the Engine Start/Stop button will not work.
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while
turning the steering wheel right and left to
release tension.
5-11
Driving your vehicle
ACC
Driving your vehicle
Button Position
ON
START
5-12
Action
Notes
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
in the ACC position without depressing the the ON position when the engine is not runclutch pedal.
ning to prevent the battery from discharging.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.
To start the engine, depress the clutch and
brake pedals and press the Engine
Start/Stop button with the shift lever in neutral.
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button without depressing the clutch pedal, the engine
does not start and the Engine Start/Stop button changes as follows:
OFF → ACC → ON → OFF
Engine Stop/Start button positions
- Vehicle with automatic transaxle
Button Position
OFF
Notes
To turn off the engine, press the Engine If the steering wheel is not locked properly
Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park). when you open the driver's door, the warning
When you press the Engine Start/Stop but- chime will sound.
ton without the shift lever in P (Park), the
Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to the
OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.
The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft.
Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the
button is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal.
Electrical accessories are usable.
The steering wheel unlocks.
If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC position for more than one hour, the battery power will turn off automatically to prevent
the battery from discharging.
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly,
the Engine Start/Stop button will not work.
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while turning the steering wheel right and left to release
tension.
5-13
5
Driving your vehicle
ACC
Action
Driving your vehicle
Button Position
ON
START
5-14
Action
Notes
Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
in the ACC position without depressing the the ON position when the engine is not runbrake pedal.
ning to prevent the battery from discharging.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.
To start the engine, depress the brake pedal
and press the Engine Start/Stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N
(Neutral) position.
For your safety, start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.
If you press the Engine Start/Stop button without depressing the brake pedal, the engine
does not start and the Engine Start/Stop button changes as follows:
OFF → ACC → ON → OFF
Starting the engine
WARNING
• Always
Starting the gasoline engine
Vehicle with manual transaxle:
1.Always carry the smart key with
you.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3.Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.
4.Depress the clutch and brake
pedal.
5.Press the Engine Start/Stop button.
5
Driving your vehicle
wear appropriate
shoes when operating your
vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as
high heels, ski boots, sandals,
flip-flops, etc., may interfere
with your ability to use the
brake, accelerator and clutch
pedals.
• Do not start the vehicle with
the
accelerator
pedal
depressed. The vehicle can
move and lead to an accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is
normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake padel
is released when the rpm is
high.
✽ NOTICE
• The engine will start by pressing
the Engine Start/Stop button, only
when the smart key is in the vehicle.
• Even if the smart key is in the
vehicle, if it is far away from the
driver, the engine may not start.
• When the Engine Start/Stop button is in the ACC or ON position,
if any door is open, the system
checks for the smart key. If the
smart key is not in the vehicle, the
"
" indicator and “KEY OUT”
indicator will blink, and if all
doors are closed, the chime will
also sound for about 5 seconds.
The indicator will turn off while
the vehicle is moving. Keep the
smart key in the vehicle when
using the ACC position or if the
vehicle engine is ON.
5-15
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle with automatic transaxle:
1.Always carry the smart key with
you.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3.Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
4.Depress the brake pedal.
5 Press the Engine Start/Stop button.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate
engine speeds. (Steep accelerating
and decelerating should be avoided.)
• Always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while
starting the vehicle. Do not race
the engine while warming it up.
5-16
Starting the diesel engine
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated before starting the engine and
then have to be warmed up before
starting to drive.
Vehicle with manual transaxle:
1.Always carry the smart key with
you.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3.Make sure the shift lever is in neutral.
4.Depress the clutch and brake
pedal.
5.Press the Engine Start/Stop button.
6.Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the glow indicator light
(
) goes out.
7.When the glow indicator light (
)
goes out, the engine will start.
Vehicle with automatic transaxle:
1.Always carry the smart key with
you.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3.Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
4.Depress the brake pedal.
5.Press the Engine Start/Stop button.
6.Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the glow indicator light
(
) goes out.
7.When the glow indicator light (
)
goes out, the engine will start.
✽ NOTICE
If the Engine Start/Stop button is
pressed while the engine is pre-heating, the engine may start.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• If the engine stalls while you
are in motion, do not attempt
to move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position.
If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still
moving and press the Engine
Start/Stop button in an
attempt to restart the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the vehicle:
Do not press the Engine
Start/Stop button for more than
10 seconds except when the
stop lamp fuse is blown.
When the stop lamp fuse is
blown, you can't start the
engine normally. Replace the
fuse with a new one. If you are
not able to replace the fuse, you
can start the engine by pressing
and
holding
the
Engine
Start/Stop button for 10 seconds with the Engine Start/Stop
button in the ACC position.
For your safety always depress
the brake and/or clutch pedal
before starting the engine.
5-17
5
Driving your vehicle
Starting and stopping the engine
for turbocharger intercooler
1.Do not race or accelerate the
engine immediately after starting
the engine.
If the engine is cold, idle for several seconds before sufficient lubrication is ensured in the turbo
charger unit.
2.After high speed or extended driving that requires heavy engine
load, idle the engine about 1
minute before turning the engine
off. This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to shutting
the engine off.
Driving your vehicle
OLMB053008
✽ NOTICE
If the smart key battery is weak or
the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the engine by
pressing the Engine Start/Stop button with the smart key in the direction of the picture above.
5-18
MANUAL TRANSAXLE
Manual transaxle operation
The manual transaxle has 6 forward
gears. The transaxle is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting
to either a higher or a lower gear is
easily accomplished.
WARNING
• Before leaving the driver’s
The shift lever can be moved without
pulling up the ring (1).
OLMB053009
When you've come to a complete
stop and it's hard to shift into 1st gear
or R (Reverse):
1.Put the shift lever in neutral and
release the clutch pedal.
2.Depress the clutch pedal, and then
shift into first or R (Reverse) gear.
5
✽ NOTICE
During cold weather, shifting may
be difficult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up.
5-19
Driving your vehicle
The ring (1) must be pulled up while
moving the shift lever.
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in 1st gear when
the vehicle is parked on a
uphill and in R (Reverse) on a
downhill, set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not followed.
• Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slippery roads. The vehicle may
slip causing an accident.
To shift to R (Reverse), make sure
the vehicle has completely stopped,
and then move the shift lever to neutral before moving into R (Reverse).
Driving your vehicle
Using the clutch
The clutch pedal should be
depressed all the way to the floor
before:
- Starting the engine
The engine will not start without
depressing the clutch pedal.
- Shifting
When releasing the clutch pedal,
release it slowly. The clutch pedal
should always be released while
driving.
CAUTION
To prevent unnecessary wear or
damage to the clutch:
• Do not rest your foot on the
clutch pedal while driving.
• Do not hold the vehicle with
the clutch on an incline, while
waiting for the traffic light, etc.
• Always depress the clutch
pedal down fully to prevent
noise or damage.
(Continued)
5-20
(Continued)
• To prevent possible damage
to the clutch system, do not
start with the 2nd (second)
gear engaged except when
you start on a slippery road.
Downshifting
Downshift when you must slow down
in heavy traffic or drive up a steep hill
to prevent engine load.
Also, downshifting reduces the
chance of stalling and can accelerate
when you need to increase your
speed again.
When the vehicle is going downhill,
downshifting helps maintain safe
speed by providing brake power from
the engine and enables less wear on
the brakes.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the
engine:
• When downshifting from 5th
gear to 4th gear, be careful not
to inadvertently push the shift
lever sideways engaging the
2nd gear. A drastic downshift
may cause the engine speed
to increase to the point the
tachometer will enter the redzone.
• Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear
when the engine is running at
high speed (5,000 RPM or
higher). Such a downshifting
may damage the engine,
clutch and the transaxle.
Good driving practices
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
5-21
5
Driving your vehicle
• Never take the vehicle out of gear
and coast down a hill. This is
extremely dangerous.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can
cause the brakes and related parts
to overheat and malfunction.
When you are driving down a long
hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. Engine braking will help slow
down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. This will help avoid
over-revving the engine, which can
cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter
cross winds. This gives you much
better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you shift into R
(Reverse) to prevent damage to
the transaxle.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
■ Left-hand drive
■ Right-hand drive
Depress the brake pedal, then move shift lever.
Press the shift button, then move shift lever.
Move shift lever.
Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has six forward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected automatically in the D (Drive) position.
5-22
OLMB053011/OLMB053011R
WARNING
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot shift the lever out of P
(Park), see “Shift-Lock Release” on
page 5-26.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
engine off.
• Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking
brake.
5
Driving your vehicle
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
• Do not use the engine brake
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slippery roads. The vehicle may
slip causing an accident.
The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
5-23
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
N (Neutral)
D (Drive)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart
a stalled engine, or if it is necessary
to stop with the engine ON. Shift into
P (Park) if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason.
Always depress the brake pedal
when you are shifting from N
(Neutral) to another gear.
This is the normal driving position.
The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence, providing the best fuel economy and
power.
For extra power when passing another vehicle or driving uphill, depress
the accelerator fully. The transaxle
will automatically downshift to the
next lower gear (or gears, as appropriate).
CAUTION
Always come to a complete
stop before shifting into or out
of R (Reverse); you may damage the transaxle if you shift
into R (Reverse) while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
• Do not shift into gear unless
your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal. Shifting into gear
when the engine is running at
high speed can cause the
vehicle to move very rapidly.
You could lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not drive with the shift
lever in N (Neutral). The
engine brake will not work
and lead to an accident.
5-24
Sports mode
In Sports Mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to select the desired range
of gears for the current driving conditions.
+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
■ Left-hand drive
Spor ts
mode
OLMB053013
■ Right-hand drive
OLMB053013R
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
5-25
5
Driving your vehicle
Spor ts
mode
✽ NOTICE
• Only the six forward gears can be
selected. To reverse or park the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the
R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down.
When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is
automatically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transaxle will
upshift automatically.
• If the driver presses the lever to +
(Up) or - (Down) position, the
transaxle may not make the
requested gear change if the next
gear is outside of the allowable
engine rpm range. The driver
must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking
care to keep the engine rpms
below the red zone.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into
the + (Up) position. This causes
the transaxle to shift into the 2nd
gear which is better for smooth
driving on a slippery road. Push
the shift lever to the - (Down) side
to shift back to the 1st gear.
Driving your vehicle
Shift-lock system
For your safety, the automatic
transaxle has a shift-lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R
(Reverse) unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or
N (Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2.Start the engine or place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3.Move the shift lever.
Shift-lock release
■ Left-hand drive
- Type A
■ Right-hand drive
- Type A
■ Left-hand drive
- Type B
■ Right-hand drive
- Type B
OLMB053012/OLMB053053/OLMB53012R/OLMB053057R
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
into R (Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue
depressing the brake, and then do the following:
5-26
■ Type A
1.Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2.Apply the parking brake.
3.Push the shift-lock release button.
4.Move the shift lever while pushing
the shift-lock release button.
5.Stop pushing the shift-lock release
button.
6.Depress the brake pedal, and then
restart the engine.
Ignition key interlock system
(if equipped)
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position.
5
Driving your vehicle
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer immediately.
■ Type B
1.Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2.Apply the parking brake.
3.Carefully remove the cap (1) covering the shift-lock access hole.
4.Insert a screwdriver into the
access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
5.Move the shift lever while holding
down the screwdriver.
6.Remove the screwdriver from the
shift-lock access hole then install
the cap.
7.Depress the brake pedal, and then
restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift-lock
release, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer immediately.
5-27
Driving your vehicle
Parking
Good driving practices
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key
with you when exiting the vehicle.
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N
(Neutral) when driving. Doing so
may result in an accident because
of a loss of engine braking and the
transaxle could be damaged.
• Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
consistent pedal pressure can
result in the brakes overheating,
brake wear and possibly even
brake failure.
• When driving in sports mode, slow
down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear
may not be engaged if the engine
rpms are outside of the allowable
range.
WARNING
When you stay in the vehicle
with the engine running, be
careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of
time. The engine or exhaust
system may overheat and start
a fire.
The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
Do not stop or park over flammable materials, such as dry
grass, paper or leaves. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
5-28
• Always apply the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle. Do not
depend on placing the transmission in P (Park) to keep the vehicle
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator.
WARNING
5
Driving your vehicle
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.
5-29
Driving your vehicle
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (IF EQUIPPED)
The Four Wheel Drive (4WD)
System delivers engine power to all
front and rear wheels for maximum
traction. 4WD is useful when extra
traction is required on roads such
slippery, muddy, wet, or snow-covered roads.
Occasional off-road use such as
established unpaved roads and trails
are OK. It is always important that
the driver carefully reduces the
speed to a level that does not exceed
the safe operating speed for those
conditions.
5-30
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• Do not drive in conditions that
exceed the vehicles intended
design such as challenging
off-road conditions.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of a rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
✽ NOTICE
• Do not drive in water if the level is
higher than the bottom of the vehicle.
• Check your brake condition once
you are out of mud or water.
Depress the brake pedal several
times as you move slowly until you
feel normal braking return.
• Shorten your scheduled maintenance interval if you drive in offroad conditions such as sand, mud
or water (see “Maintenance Under
Severe Usage Conditions” in chapter 7).
• Always wash your vehicle thoroughly after off road use, especially the bottom of the vehicle.
• Be sure to equip the vehicle with
four tires of the same size and
type.
• Make sure that a full time 4WD
vehicle is towed by a flat bed tow
truck.
4WD operation
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) mode selection
Transfer mode
Selection button
Indicator light
4WD AUTO
(4WD LOCK is
deactivated)
(not illuminated)
(illuminated)
In the 4WD AUTO mode, under normal operating conditions,
the vehicle operates similar to conventional 2WD vehicles. If the
system determines there is a need for four wheel drive, the
engine’s driving power is distributed to all four wheels automatically.
Use this mode when driving on normal roads.
In the 4WD LOCK mode, the system is deactivated when vehicle speed is over 30 km/h (19mph) and the mode is shifted to
4WD AUTO mode. If the vehicle speed slows down to 30 km/h
(19mph), the mode shifts back to the 4WD LOCK mode.
Use this mode when driving up or down sharp inclines, driving
off-road, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc. to maximize
traction
WARNING
If 4WD warning light (
) stays on the instrument cluster, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the
4WD system. When the 4WD warning light (
) illuminates we recommend that the vehicle be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
5-31
5
Driving your vehicle
4WD LOCK
Description
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
When driving on normal roads,
deactivate the 4WD LOCK mode
by pushing the 4WD LOCK button (4WD LOCK indicator light
goes off). Driving on normal
roads with the 4WD LOCK
mode, especially, when cornering may cause mechanical
noise or vibration. The noise
and vibration will disappear
when the 4WD LOCK mode is
deactivated. Prolong driving
with the noise and vibration
may damage some parts of the
power train.
✽ NOTICE
When the 4WD LOCK mode is
deactivated, a sensation may be felt
as the driving power is delivered
entirely to the front wheels.
5-32
For safe 4WD operation
Before driving
• Make sure all passengers are
wearing seat belts.
• Sit upright and closer to the steering wheel than usual. Adjust the
steering wheel to a position comfortable for you to drive.
Driving on snow-covered or icy
roads
• Start off slowly by applying the
accelerator pedal gently.
• Use snow tires or tire chains.
• Keep sufficient distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you.
• Use engine braking during deceleration.
• Avoid speeding, rapid acceleration,
sudden brake applications, and
sharp turns to prevent skids.
Driving in sand or mud
• Maintain slow and constant speed.
• Use tire chains driving in mud if
necessary.
• Keep sufficient distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you.
• Reduce vehicle speed and always
check the road condition.
• Avoid speeding, rapid acceleration,
sudden brake applications, and
sharp turns to prevent getting
stuck.
When the vehicle is stuck in
snow, sand or mud, place a nonslip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction OR
Slowly spin the wheels in forward and reverse directions
which causes a rocking motion
that may free the vehicle.
However, avoid running the
engine continuously at high
rpm, doing so may damage the
4WD system.
Exercise extreme caution driving up or down steep hills. The
vehicle may flip depending on
the
grade,
terrain
and
water/mud conditions.
OLMB053017
Driving up or down hills
• Driving uphill
- Before starting off, check if it is
possible to drive uphill.
- Drive as straight as possible.
• Driving downhill
- Do not change gear while driving
downhill. Select gear before driving downhill.
- Driveas slowly using engine braking while driving downhill.
- Drive straight as possible.
5
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
WARNING
5-33
Driving your vehicle
Driving through water
• Try to avoid driving in deep standing water. It may stall your engine
and clog your exhaust pipes.
• If you need to drive in water, stop
your vehicle, set the vehicle in
4WD LOCK mode and drive under
8 km/h (5mph).
• Do not change gear while driving in
water.
OLMB053018
CAUTION
WARNING
Do not drive across the contour
of steep hills. A slight change in
the wheel angle can destabilize
the vehicle, or a stable vehicle
may lose stability if the vehicle
stops its forward motion. Your
vehicle may roll over and lead to
a serious injury or death.
5-34
Always drive slowly in water. If
you drive too fast, water may
get into the engine compartment and wet the ignition system causing your vehicle to
suddenly stop.
Additional driving conditions
• Become familiar with the off-road
conditions before driving.
• Always pay attention when driving
off-road and avoid dangerous
areas.
• Drive slowly when driving in heavy
wind.
• Reduce vehicle speed when cornering. The center of gravity of
4WD vehicles is higher than conventional 2WD vehicles, making
them more likely to roll over when
you rapidly turn corners.
Emergency precautions
Tires
OLMB053019
• Always hold the steering wheel
firmly when you are driving offroad.
Do not grab the inside of the
steering wheel when you are
driving off-road. You may hurt
your arm by a sudden steering
maneuver or from steering
wheel rebound due to an impact
with objects on the ground. You
could lose control of the steering wheel that may lead to serious injury or death.
4WD vehicles must be towed with a
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the
ground. For more information, refer
to “Towing” in chapter 6.
Dynamometer testing
A full-time 4WD vehicle must be tested on a special four wheel chassis
dynamometer.
5
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
Do not use tire and wheel with different size and type from the one originally installed on your vehicle. It can
affect the safety and performance of
your vehicle, which could lead to
steering failure or rollover causing
serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be sure to
equip all four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type, tread,
brand and load-carrying capacity. If
you equip your vehicle with any
tire/wheel combination not recommended by HYUNDAI for off-road
driving, you should not use these
tires for highway driving.
Towing
WARNING
Never start or run the engine
while a full-time 4WD vehicle is
raised on a jack. The vehicle can
slip or roll off of a jack causing
serious injury or death to you or
those nearby.
5-35
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
• Never engage the parking
Temporary Free Roller
brake while performing the
test.
• When the vehicle is lifted up,
do not operate the front and
rear wheel separately. All four
wheels should be operated.
Roll Tester (Speedometer)
OLMB053020
A full-time 4WD vehicle should not
be tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a
2WD roll tester must be used, perform the following procedure:
1.Check the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
2.Place the front wheels on the roll
tester for a speedometer test as
shown in the illustration.
3.Release the parking brake.
4.Place the rear wheels on the temporary free roller as shown in the
illustration.
5-36
WARNING
Keep away from the front of the
vehicle while the vehicle is in
gear on the dynamometer. The
vehicle can jump forward and
cause serious injury or death.
BRAKING SYSTEM
Power brakes
WARNING
Take the following precautions:
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, excessive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending a long or
steep hill, shift to a lower gear
and avoid continuous application of the brakes. Applying
the brakes continuously will
cause the brakes to overheat
and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle’s ability to safely slow
down; the vehicle may also
pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Applying
the brakes lightly will indicate
whether they have been
affected in this way. Always
test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep
water. To dry the brakes, lightly tap the brake pedal to heat
up the brakes while maintaining a safe forward speed until
brake performance returns to
normal. Avoid driving at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.
5-37
5
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
You can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than typical. The stopping distance, however, will be longer than
with power brakes.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high pitched warning sound from
your front or rear brakes. You may
hear this sound come and go or it
may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Please remember some driving conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
CAUTION
To avoid costly brake repairs,
do not continue to drive with
worn brake pads.
✽ NOTICE
Always replace brake pads as complete front or rear axle sets.
5-38
Parking brake
OLMB053022
OLMB053021
Always set the parking brake before
leaving the vehicle, to apply:
■ Foot type
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Depress the parking brake pedal
down as far as possible.
■ Hand type
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Pull up the parking brake lever as far
as possible.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, do not operate the parking brake while the
vehicle is moving except in an
emergency situation. It could
damage the brake system and
lead to an accident.
WARNING
• Whenever leaving the vehicle
OLMB053024
To release:
■ Foot type
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Depress the parking brake pedal
down and it will release automatically.
■ Hand type
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Slightly pull up the parking brake
lever.
While pressing the release button
(1), lower the parking brake (2).
If the parking brake does not release
or does not release all the way, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
5-39
5
Driving your vehicle
OLMB053023
or parking, always come to a
complete stop and continue
to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the
1st gear (for manual transaxle
vehicle) or P (Park, for automatic transaxle vehicle) position, then apply the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF position.
Vehicles with the parking
brake not fully engaged are at
risk for moving inadvertently
and causing injury to yourself
or others.
• NEVER allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• Only release the parking
brake when you are seated
inside the vehicle with your
foot firmly on the brake pedal.
CAUTION
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal while the parking brake
is engaged. If you depress the
accelerator pedal with the
parking brake engaged, warning will sound. Damage to the
parking brake may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake
on can overheat the braking
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake
parts. Make sure the parking
brake is released and the
Brake Warning Light is off
before driving.
5-40
Check the Parking
Brake Warning Light
by placing the ignition
switch to the ON position (do not start the
engine).
This light will be illuminated when the
parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is released and the Brake
Warning Light is OFF.
If the Parking Brake Warning Light
remains on after the parking brake is
released while engine is running,
there may be a malfunction in the
brake system. Immediate attention is
necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
(if equipped )
WARNING
ABS is an electronic braking system
that helps prevent a braking skid.
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time.
Using ABS
To obtain the maximum benefit from
your ABS in an emergency situation,
do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Depress your
brake pedal as hard as possible.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and it means your ABS is
active.
ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle.
Always maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front of you.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from sudden changes in
direction, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather conditions.
5-41
5
Driving your vehicle
An Anti-Lock Braking System
(ABS) or an Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system will not
prevent accidents due to
improper or dangerous driving
maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance
between you and objects ahead
of you. Vehicle speeds should
always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The
braking distance for cars
equipped with ABS or ESC may
be longer than for those without
these systems in the following
road conditions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Drive your vehicle at reduced
speeds during the following
conditions:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
• On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different
surface height.
• Tire chains are installed on
your vehicle.
The safety features of an ABS
or ESC equipped vehicle should
not be tested by high speed
driving or cornering. This could
endanger the safety of yourself
or others.
Driving your vehicle
ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability. Always steer moderately when
braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause
your vehicle to veer into oncoming
traffic or off the road.
On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stopping
distance than for vehicles equipped
with a conventional brake system.
The ABS warning light (
) will stay
on for several seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position.
During that time, the ABS will go
through self-diagnosis and the light
will go off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. We recommend
that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
If the ABS warning light (
) is
on and stays on, you may have
a problem with the ABS. Your
power brakes will work normally. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, we recommend
that you contact your HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy
road, and apply your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active
continuously and the ABS warning light (
) may illuminate.
Pull your car over to a safe place
and turn the engine off.
Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS
system
is
normal.
Otherwise, you may have a problem with your ABS system. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
✽ NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
ABS warning light (
) may turn
on at the same time. This happens
because of the low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS is malfunctioning. Have the battery recharged
before driving the vehicle.
5-42
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (if equipped)
■ Left-hand drive
- Type A
■ Right-hand drive
- Type A
■ Left-hand drive
- Type B
■ Right-hand drive
- Type B
WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when
cornering. The ESC system will
not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers, and hydroplaning
on wet surfaces can result in
severe accidents.
5
Driving your vehicle
OLMB053027/OLMB053028/OLMB053028R/OLMB053029R
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks where you are steering and
where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies braking pressure to any
one of the vehicle’s brakes and intervenes in the engine management system to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path. It is
not a substitute for safe driving practices. Always adjust your speed and
driving to the road conditions.
5-43
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the ESC and the ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for approximately three seconds and goes off,
then the ESC is turned on.
If this light stays on, your vehicle may
have a malfunction with the ESC system. We recommend that the vehicle
be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
5-44
When operating
When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light
blinks:
• When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This
is normal and it means your ESC is
active.
• When the ESC activates, the
engine may not respond to the
accelerator as it does under routine conditions.
• If the Cruise Control was in use
when the ESC activates, the cruise
control automatically disengages.
The Cruise Control can be reengaged when the road conditions
allow. See “Cruise Control System”
later in this chapter.
• When moving out of the mud or
driving on a slippery road, the
engine rpm (revolutions per
minute) may not increase even if
you press the accelerator pedal
deeply. This is to maintain the stability and traction of the vehicle and
does not indicate a problem.
ESC OFF condition
To cancel ESC operation :
Indicator lights
■ ESC indicator light (blinks)
■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)
When the ignition switch is placed to
the ON position, the ESC indicator
light illuminates, then goes off if the
ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever the ESC is operating.
If ESC indicator light stays on, your
vehicle may have a malfunction with
the ESC system. When this warning
light illuminates we recommend that
the vehicle be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
5-45
5
Driving your vehicle
• State 1
Press the ESC OFF button shortly
(ESC OFF indicator light illuminates). At this state, the engine control function does not operate. In
other words, the traction control
function does not operate but only
the brake control function operates.
• State 2
Press the ESC OFF button for more
than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indicator
light illuminates and ESC OFF warning chime will sound. At this state,
the engine control function and brake
control function does not operate. In
other words, the vehicle stability control function does not operate any
more.
If the ignition switch is placed to the
LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,
ESC remains off. Upon restarting the
engine, the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
When the ESC is blinking, this
indicates the ESC is active:
Drive slowly and NEVER
attempt to accelerate. NEVER
press the ESC OFF button while
the ESC indicator light is blinking or you may lose control of
the vehicle resulting in an accident.
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or
wheel sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. When
replacing tires, make sure they
are the same size as your original tires for this vehicle.
ESC OFF usage
When Driving
The ESC OFF mode should only be
used briefly to help free the vehicle if
stuck in snow or mud by temporarily
stopping operation of the ESC to
maintain wheel torque.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving on
a flat road surface.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the
transaxle:
• Do not allow wheel(s) of one
axle to spin excessively while
the ESC, ABS, and brake
warning lights are displayed.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Reduce engine power and do
not spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights are
displayed.
• When operating the vehicle
on a dynamometer, ensure the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF
light illuminated).
✽ NOTICE
Turning the ESC OFF does not
affect ABS or standard brake system operation.
5-46
Vehicle Stability Management
(if equipped)
VSM operation
VSM ON condition
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM)
helps ensure the vehicle stays stable
when accelerating or braking suddenly on wet, slippery and rough
roads where traction over the four
tires can suddenly become uneven.
The VSM operates when:
• The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 15 km/h (9mph) on curve
roads.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 20 km/h (12mph) when the
vehicle is braking on rough roads.
WARNING
5
When operating
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may activate the
ESC, you may hear sounds from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your VSM is active.
Driving your vehicle
Take the following precautions
when using the Vehicle Stability
Management (VSM):
• ALWAYS check the speed and
the distance to the vehicle
ahead. The VSM is not a substitute for safe driving practices.
• Never drive too fast for the
road conditions. The VSM system will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in bad
weather, slippery and uneven
roads can result in severe
accidents.
✽ NOTICE
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradient or incline
• Driving rearward.
• ESC OFF indicator light is on.
• EPS (Electric Power Steering)
warning light (
) is on.
5-47
Driving your vehicle
VSM OFF condition
To cancel VSM operation, press the
ESC OFF button. ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) will illuminate.
To turn on VSM, press the ESC OFF
button again. The ESC OFF indicator
light will go out.
WARNING
If ESC indicator light ( ) or
EPS warning light (
) stays
on, your vehicle may have a
malfunction with the VSM system. When the warning light illuminates we recommend that the
vehicle be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or
wheel sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. When
replacing tires, make sure they
are the same size as your original tires for this vehicle.
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
(if equipped)
The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
prevents the vehicle from rolling
backwards when starting a vehicle
from a stop on a hill. The system
operates the brakes automatically for
approximately 2 seconds and releases the brake when the accelerator
pedal is depressed or after 2 seconds.
WARNING
Always be ready to depress the
accelerator pedal when starting
off on a incline. The HAC activates only for approximately 2
seconds.
✽ NOTICE
• The HAC does not operate when
the shift lever is in P (Park) or N
(Neutral)
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is off but does not activate when the ESC has malfunctioned.
5-48
Downhill Brake Control (DBC) (if equipped)
■ Left-hand drive
- Type A
■ Right-hand drive
- Type A
■ Left-hand drive
- Type B
■ Right-hand drive
- Type B
WARNING
Always turn off the DBC on normal roads. The DBC might activate inadvertently from the
standby mode when driving
through speed bumps or making sharp curves.
✽ NOTICE
OLMB053030/OLMB053031/OLMB053031R/OLMB053032R
The Downhill Brake Control (DBC) supports the driver come down a steep
hill without depressing the brake pedal. It slows down the vehicle under 8
km/h (5mph) (for automatic transaxle vehicles) or 8 km/h (5 mph) (for manual transaxle vehicles) and lets the driver concentrate on steering the vehicle.
5-49
5
Driving your vehicle
• The DBC defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position.
• Noise or vibration may occur from
the brakes when the DBC is activated.
• The rear stop light comes on when
DBC is activated.
Driving your vehicle
DBC operation
Mode
WARNING
Indicator light
Description
Press the DBC button when vehicle speed is under
40km/h (25mph). The DBC system will turn ON and
enter the standby mode.
Standby
illuminated
Activated
blinks
Temporarily
deactivated
illuminated
The system does not turn ON if vehicle speed is over
40km/h (25mph).
In the standby mode, if vehicle speed is under 35km/h
(22mph) while driving down a steep hill, the DBC will
activate automatically.
In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deactivate under the following conditions:
• The hill is not steep enough.
• The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.
If the above conditions are gone, the DBC will automatically activate again.
The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:
OFF
• The DBC button is pressed again.
not
illuminated
5-50
• Vehicle speed is over 60km/h (38mph).
If the DBC red indicator light
illuminates, the system may
have overheated or have malfunctioned. When the warning
light illuminates even though
the DBC system has cooled off,
we recommend that the vehicle
be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.
✽ NOTICE
• The DBC may not deactivate on
steep inclines even though the
brake or accelerator pedal is
depressed.
• Do not turn on the DBC when
driving with shift lever in 3rd gear
(and above) for vehicles with manual transaxle. The engine may stop
if the DBC system is activated.
• The DBC does not operate when:
- The shift lever is in P (Park).
- The ESC is activated.
Good braking practices
WARNING
If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe location.
Keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped to
prevent the vehicle from rolling forward.
5
Driving your vehicle
Whenever leaving the vehicle or
parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into the 1st gear
(for manual transaxle vehicle)
or P (Park, for automatic
transaxle vehicle) position, then
apply the parking brake, and
place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
Vehicles with the parking brake
not fully engaged are at risk for
moving inadvertently and causing injury to yourself or others.
Wet brakes can be dangerous! The
brakes may get wet if the vehicle is
driven through standing water or if it
is washed. Your vehicle will not stop
as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet
brakes may cause the vehicle to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns
to normal, taking care to keep the
vehicle under control at all times. If
the braking action does not return to
normal, stop as soon as it is safe to
do so and we recommend that you
call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for assistance.
DO NOT drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
constant pedal pressure can result in
the brakes overheating, brake wear,
and possibly even brake failure.
5-51
Driving your vehicle
DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM
Rear view camera
(if equipped)
The Rear View Camera will activate
when the engine is running and the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
This is a supplemental system that
shows behind the vehicle through
the rearview mirror or navigation display while backing-up.
■ Type A
OLMB043242
■ Type B
OLMB0433122
OLMB043241
5-52
■ Type B
The rear view camera can be turned
off by pressing the ON/OFF button
when the rear view camera is activated. Press the ON/OFF button
once more to turn on the rear view
camera when the engine is running
and the shift lever in R (Reverse).
Whenever the vehicle is turned off
and on the rear view camera turns
on automatically.
WARNING
• ALWAYS look around your
vehicle to make sure there are
no objects or obstacles
before moving the vehicle in
any direction to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven
close to objects, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. The camera may not
work normally if the lens is
covered with foreign material.
Rear parking assist system
(if equipped )
✽ NOTICE
The system may not recognize
objects less than 30 cm (12 in.) from
the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance.
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not push, scratch or strike
the sensor with any hard
objects that could damage the
surface of the sensor. Sensor
damage could occur.
• ALWAYS look around your
Sensors
OLMB043239
5
Driving your vehicle
The Rear Parking Assist System
aids the driver during backward
movement of the vehicle by chiming
if any object is sensed within the distance of about 120 cm (47 in.)
behind the vehicle. This is a supplemental system that senses objects
within the range and location of the
sensors, it can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed.
vehicle to make sure there are
no objects or obstacles
before moving the vehicle in
any direction to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven
close to objects, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children.
• Be aware that some objects
may not be detected by the
sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all
of which can limit the effectiveness of the sensor.
5-53
Driving your vehicle
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operation condition
• This system will activate when
backing up with the engine running.
• Sensing distance when backing up
is approximately 120 cm (47 in.)
when you are driving less than 10
km/h (6 mph).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sounds
• When an object is 120 cm (47 in.)
to 61 cm (24 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps intermittently.
• When an object is 60 cm (24 in.) to
31 cm (12 in.) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer sounds two beeps
intermittently.
• When an object is within 30 cm (12
in.) of the rear bumper: Buzzer
sounds continuously.
If the audible warning does not
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently when shifting into R
(Reverse) position, this may indicate
a malfunction with the Parking Assist
System. If this occurs, we recommend that your vehicle be checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
5-54
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system
may not operate normally when:
• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.
• The sensor is covered or stained
with foreign matter, such as snow
or water, or the sensor cover is
blocked.
There is a possibility of a parking
assist system malfunction when:
• Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
• Objects generating excessive
noise such as vehicle horns, loud
motorcycle engines, or truck air
brakes can interfere with the sensor.
• Heavy rain or water spray is present.
• Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are present near the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with snow.
• Any non-factory equipment or
accessories have been installed,
or if the vehicle bumper height or
sensor installation has been modified.
• Trailer towing.
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or damage to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants do to a rear parking assist system malfunction.
Always drive safely and cautiously.
5
Driving your vehicle
Detecting range may decrease
when:
• Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
• Undetectable objects smaller than
about 1 m (40 in.) and narrower
than about 14 cm (6 in.) in diameter.
WARNING
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
• Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
• Objects, which tend to absorb sensor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
5-55
Driving your vehicle
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Cruise control operation
OLMB053036
1.CRUISE indicator
2.SET indicator
The cruise control system allows you
to drive at speeds above 40 km/h (25
mph) without depressing the accelerator pedal.
5-56
WARNING
Take the following precautions:
• If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated) the cruise control can be
activated
unintentionally.
Keep the cruise control system off (CRUISE indicator
light OFF) when the cruise
control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the cruise control system
only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
• Do not use the cruise control
when it may not be safe to
keep the vehicle at a constant
speed:
- Driving in heavy or varying
speed traffic.
- On slippery (rainy, icy or
snow covered) roads.
- Hilly or winding roads.
- Very windy areas.
To set cruise control speed
OLMB053037
1.Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The CRUISE indicator will illuminate.
2.Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 40 km/h
(25 mph).
To increase cruise control
speed
• Depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle attains the
desired speed, push the lever (1)
down (to SET-).
OLMB053038
✽ NOTICE
The vehicle may slow down or speed
up slightly while going uphill or
downhill.
5
OLMB053039
• Push the lever (1) up (to RES+)
and hold it, while monitoring the
SET speed on the instrument cluster. Release the lever when the
desired speed is shown and the
vehicle will accelerate to that
speed.
• Push the lever (1) up (to RES+)
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will increase 2.0
km/h (1.2 mph) or 1.6 km/h (1.0
mph) each time the lever is operated in this manner.
Driving your vehicle
3.Push the lever (1) down (to SET-) ,
and release it. The SET indicator
light will illuminate.
4.Release the accelerator pedal.
5-57
Driving your vehicle
To decrease cruise control
speed
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control ON
Cruise control will be canceled
when:
Depress the accelerator pedal. When
you take your foot off the accelerator,
the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
If you push the lever down (to SET-)
at the increased speed, the cruise
control will maintain the increased
speed.
OLMB053038
OLMB053040
• Push the lever (1) down (to SET-)
and hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the lever
at the speed you want to maintain.
• Push the lever (1) down (to SET-)
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will decrease 2.0
km/h (1.2 mph) or 1.6 km/h (1.0
mph) each time the lever is operated in this manner.
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired
speed, push the lever (1) down
(to SET-).
• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Pressing the CANCEL switch
located on the steering wheel.
• Pushing the CRUISE button. Both
the CRUISE indicator and the SET
indicator will turn OFF.
• Depressing the clutch pedal.
(for manual transaxle vehicle)
• Moving the shift lever into N
(Neutral).
(for automatic transaxle vehicle)
5-58
• Decreasing the vehicle speed
lower than the memory speed by
15 km/h (9 mph).
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to
less than approximately 40 km/h
(25 mph).
• The ESC is operating.
• Downshifting to the 2nd gear with
Sports mode.
To resume preset cruising
speed
To turn cruise control off
✽ NOTICE
OLMB053037
OLMB053039
Push the lever (1) up (to RES+). If
the vehicle speed is over 40 km/h (25
mph), the vehicle will resume the
preset speed.
• Push the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light will go off).
• Turn the engine OFF.
5-59
5
Driving your vehicle
Each of the above actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument
cluster will go off), but only pressing
the CRUISE button will turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, push the
lever up (to RES+) located on your
steering wheel. You will return to
your previously preset speed, unless
the system was turned off using the
CRUISE button.
Driving your vehicle
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions
Rocking the vehicle
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud or sand:
Drive cautiously and allow extra distance for braking.
Avoid sudden movements in braking
or steering.
If stuck in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between 1st and R (Reverse,
for manual transaxle vehicle) or R
(Reverse) and a forward gear (for
automatic transaxle vehicle).
Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and
do not race the engine.
To prevent transaxle wear, wait until
the wheels stop spinning before
shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal while
the transaxle is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking
motion that may free the vehicle.
WARNING
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slippery surfaces can cause an
accident. The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.
Use sand, rock salt, or other non-slip
material under the drive wheels to
provide traction when stalled in ice,
snow, or mud.
5-60
WARNING
If the tires spin at high speed
the tires can explode, and you
or others may be injured. Do not
attempt this procedure if people
or objects are anywhere near
the vehicle.
The vehicle can overheat causing an engine compartment fire
or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and
avoid spinning the wheels at
speeds over 56 km/h (35 mph)
as indicated on the speedometer.
CAUTION
If you are still stuck after rocking the vehicle a few times, have
the vehicle pulled out by a tow
vehicle to avoid engine overheating, possible damage to the
transaxle, and tire damage. See
“Towing” in chapter 6.
To prevent damage to the
transaxle, turn OFF the ESC (if
equipped) prior to rocking the
vehicle.
Smooth cornering
Driving at night
OLMB053042
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration.
Night driving presents more hazards
than driving in the daylight. Here are
some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's headlights.
5-61
5
Driving your vehicle
OLMB053041
Driving your vehicle
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed. Dirty or improperly
aimed headlights will make it much
more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
OLMB053043
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous. Here are a few things to
consider when driving in the rain or
on slick pavement:
• Slow down and allow extra following distance. A heavy rainfall
makes it harder to see and increases the distance needed to stop
your vehicle.
• Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if
equipped)
• Replace your windshield wiper
blades when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the
windshield.
5-62
• Be sure your tires have enough
tread. If your tires do not have
enough tread, making a quick stop
on wet pavement can cause a skid
and possibly lead to an accident.
See “Tire Tread” in chapter 7.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe your brakes may be
wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation
returns.
Reducing the risk of a rollover
If the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough, your vehicle may
have little or no contact with the road
surface and actually ride on the
water. The best advice is SLOW
DOWN when the road is wet. The
risk of hydroplaning increases as the
depth of tire tread decreases, refer to
“Tire Tread” in chapter 7.
Your multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV). SUV’s have higher
ground clearance and a narrower
track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. The specific design
characteristics give them a higher
center of gravity than ordinary vehicles making them more likely to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Due to this risk, driver and passengers are strongly recommended
to buckle their seat belts. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
There are steps that a driver can
make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
vehicle with heavy cargo on the roof,
and never modify your vehicle in any
way.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
reduced.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To prevent rollovers or loss of control:
• Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger vehicle.
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers.
• Do not modify your vehicle in
any way that you would raise
the center of gravity.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Do not carry heavy cargo on
the roof.
WARNING
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Make sure all
passengers are wearing their
seat belts.
5-63
5
Driving your vehicle
Hydroplaning
Driving your vehicle
WINTER DRIVING
Snow or icy conditions
OLMB053045
You need to keep sufficient distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you.
Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids to occur.
5-64
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
Always carry emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to
carry include tire chains, tow straps
or chains, a flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables,
a window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
Snow tires
WARNING
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your
vehicle may be adversely affected.
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure to use radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
The traction provided by snow tires
on dry roads may not be as high as
your vehicle's original equipment
tires. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
✽ NOTICE
WARNING
OLMB053046
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner than other types of tires, they
may be damaged by mounting some
types of tire chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is
recommended instead of tire chains.
Do not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; if
unavoidable use a wire type chain. If
tire chains must be used, use genuine HYUNDAI parts and install the
tire chain after reviewing the instructions provided with the tire chains.
Damage to your vehicle caused by
improper tire chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturer’s
warranty.
The use of tire chains may
adversely affect vehicle handling:
• Drive less than 30 km/h (20
mph) or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed
limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns,
and other road hazards, which
may cause the vehicle to
bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked
wheel braking.
5-65
5
Driving your vehicle
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local and municipal
regulations for possible restrictions
against their use.
Tire chains
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Chain Installation
• Install tire chains on the front tires
for 2WD vehicles or on all four
tires for 4WD vehicles. It should
be noted that installing tire chains
on the tires will provide a greater
driving force, but will not prevent
side skids.
• Do not install studded tires without first checking local and municipal regulations for possible
restrictions against their use.
When installing tire chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
mount them as tightly possible. Drive
slowly (less than 30 km/h (20 mph))
with chains installed. If you hear the
chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still
make contact, slow down until the
noise stops. Remove the tire chains
as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning Flasher and place a
triangular emergency warning device
behind the vehicle (if available).
Always place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine before installing snow
chains.
5-66
CAUTION
When using tire chains:
• Wrong size chains or improp-
•
•
•
•
•
erly installed chains can damage your vehicle's brake lines,
suspension, body and wheels.
Use SAE “S” class or wire
chains.
If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to prevent
contact with the vehicle body.
To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driving 0.5~1.0 km (0.3~0.6 miles).
Do not use tire chains on
vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels. If unavoidable,
use a wire type chain.
Use wire chains less than 15
mm (0.59 in) wide to prevent
damage to the chain’s connection.
Winter precaution
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in section 7. We recommend that the
level of charge in your battery be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
To keep locks from freezing
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
section 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, we recommend that you
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in section 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
most auto parts outlets. Do not use
engine coolant or other types of antifreeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
5-67
5
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
Driving your vehicle
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.
If there is a risk the parking brake
may freeze, apply it only temporarily
while you put the shift lever in P
(automatic transaxle) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
vehicle to be sure the movement of
the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
5-68
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tire chains, tow straps or
chains, flashlight, emergency flares,
sand, shovel, jumper cables, window
scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc.
Don't place foreign objects or
materials in the engine compartment
Placement of foreign objects or materials which prevent cooling of the
engine, in the engine compartment,
may cause a failure or combustion.
The manufacturer is not responsible
for the damage caused by such
placement.
TRAILER TOWING (FOR EUROPE)
WARNING
Take the following precautions:
• If you don't use the correct
equipment
and/or
drive
improperly, you can lose control of the vehicle when you
are pulling a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy,
the braking performance may
be reduced. You and your passengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer
only if you have followed all
the steps in this section.
• Before towing, make sure the
total trailer weight, GCW
(Gross Combination Weight),
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight),
GAW (Gross Axle Weight ) and
trailer tongue load are all within the limits.
✽ NOTICE - For Europe
• The technically permissible maximum load on the rear axle(s) may
be exceeded by not more than 15
% and the technically permissible
maximum laden mass of the vehicle may be exceeded by not more
than 10 % or 100 kg (220.4 lbs),
whichever value is lower. In this
case, do not exceed 100 km/h (62.1
mph) for vehicle of category M1 or
80 km/h (49.7 mph) for vehicle of
category N1.
• When a vehicle of category M1 is
towing a trailer, the additional
load imposed at the trailer coupling device may cause the tire
maximum load ratings to be
exceeded, but not by more than
15 %. In this case, do not exceed
100 km/h (62.1 mph) and increase
the tire inflation pressure by at
least 0.2 bar.
5-69
5
Driving your vehicle
If you are considering to tow with
your vehicle, you should first check
with your country's Department of
Motor Vehicles to determine legal
requirements. Since laws vary the
requirements for towing trailers, cars,
or other types of vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for further details
before towing.
Remember that trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering requires
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly. Damage to your vehicle caused by improper trailer towing
is not covered by your vehicle manufacturer’s warranty.
This section contains many timetested, important trailering tips and
safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of
your passengers. Please read this
section carefully before you pull a
trailer.
Driving your vehicle
If you decide to pull a trailer?
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a trailer hitch dealer about
sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your
vehicle during its first 2,000 km
(1,200 miles) in order to allow the
engine to properly break in. Failure
to heed this caution may result in
serious engine or transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for further information on
additional requirements such as a
towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 100 km/h
(60 mph)) or posted towing speed
limit.
• On a long uphill grade, do not
exceed 70 km/h (45 mph) or the
posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• Carefully observe the weight and
load limits provided in the following
pages.
5-70
Trailer weight
Tongue Load
Tongue load
Total Trailer Weight
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
OLMB053047
OLMB053048
What is the maximum safe weight of
a trailer? It should never weigh more
than the maximum trailer weight with
trailer brakes. But even that can be
too heavy. It depends on how you
plan to use your trailer. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how often your
vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. The ideal trailer weight
can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your
vehicle.
The tongue load is an important
weight to measure because it affects
the total Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. The trailer
tongue should weigh a maximum of
10% of the total loaded trailer weight,
within the limits of the maximum trailer tongue load permissible.
After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be
able to correct them simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
WARNING
Engine
Gasoline Engine
2.0L
M/T
A/T
2.4L
A/T
M/T
A/T
Without brake
System
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
750
(1653)
With brake
System
1900
(4189)
1600
(3527)
1600
(3527)
2000
(4409)
1600
(3527)
80
(176)
80
(176)
80
(176)
80
(176)
80
(176)
Item
Maximum trailer
weight
kg (Ibs.)
Diesel Engine
Maximum permissible static
vertical load on the coupling
device
kg (Ibs.)
Recommended distance from
rear wheel center to coupling
point
2.0L
5
Driving your vehicle
Take the following precautions:
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be
loaded with approximately
60% of the total trailer load;
the rear should be loaded with
approximately 40% of the total
trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or
trailer towing equipment.
Improper loading can result in
damage to your vehicle and/or
personal
injury.
Check
weights and loading at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with
scales.
Reference weight and distance when trailer towing a trailer
963
(37.9)
mm (inch)
M/T : Manual transaxle
A/T : Automatic transaxle
5-71
Driving your vehicle
Trailer towing equipment
Hitches
■ Left side
■ Right side
5-72
It's important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to
follow:
• Do you have to make any holes in
the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch. If you
don’t seal them, carbon monoxide
(CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle, as well as dirt
and water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
• A HYUNDAI trailer hitch accessory
is available at an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Trailer brakes
Driving with a trailer
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufacturer or trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains. Always leave
just enough slack so you can turn
with your trailer. And, never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms
your country’s regulations and that it
is properly installed and operating
correctly.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trailer brakes loaded, then it needs its
own brakes and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so
you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly. Be sure not
to tap into your vehicle's brake system.
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting
out for the open road, you must get
to know your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that
the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not nearly as responsive
as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector(s), lights, tires
and brakes.
During your trip, occasionally check
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and trailer brakes
are still working.
WARNING
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely certain that you have properly set up the brake system. This
is not a task for amateurs. Use
an experienced, competent
trailer shop for this work.
5-73
5
Driving your vehicle
Safety chains
Driving your vehicle
Distance
Backing up
Turn signals
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, move your hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected,
the trailer lights will also flash to alert
other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you
may think drivers behind you are
seeing your signals when, in fact,
they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you disconnect and then reconnect the
wires.
Passing
You will need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because of the increased
vehicle length, you’ll need to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before you can return to your
lane.
5-74
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do
this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer lighting
system directly to your vehicle’s lighting system. Use an
approved trailer wiring harness.
Failure to do so could result in
damage to the vehicle electrical
system and/or personal injury.
Consult
an
authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
Driving on hills
CAUTION
To prevent engine and/or
transaxle overheating:
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not
overheat. If the needle of the
coolant temperature gauge
moves towards “H” (HOT), pull
over and stop as soon as it is
safe to do so, and allow the
engine to idle until it cools
down. You may proceed once
the engine has cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide your vehicle
speed according to the trailer
weight and uphill grade.
5-75
5
Driving your vehicle
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
overheated and may not operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around 70
km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trailer brakes and you have an automatic transaxle , you should drive in D
(Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer will minimize
heat build-up and extend the life of
your transaxle.
Driving your vehicle
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer
attached to your vehicle, you should
not park your vehicle on a hill.
However, if you ever have to park
your trailer on a hill, here's how to do
it:
1.Pull the vehicle into the parking
space.
Turn the steering wheel in the
direction of the curb (right if headed down hill, left if headed up hill).
2.Shift the vehicle to P (Park, for
automatic transaxle vehicle) or
neutral (for manual transaxle vehicle).
3.Set the parking brake and shut off
the vehicle.
4.Place wheel chocks under the trailer wheels on the down hill side of
the wheels.
5.Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,
shift to neutral, release the parking
brake and slowly release the
brakes until the trailer chocks
absorb the load.
6.Reapply the brakes and parking
brakes.
7.Move the shift lever to P (Park, for
automatic transaxle vehicle) or 1st
gear when the vehicle is parked on
a uphill grade and in R (Reverse)
on a downhill (for manual transaxle
vehicle).
8.Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the parking brake set.
WARNING
To prevent serious or fatal
injury:
Do not get out of the vehicle
without the parking brake firmly
set. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You and others could
be seriously or fatally injured.
5-76
Maintenance when towing a
trailer
1.With the shift lever to P (Park, for
automatic transaxle vehicle) or
neutral (for manual transaxle vehicle), apply your brakes and hold
the brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2.Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3.Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4.Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you regularly pull a trailer. Important items to pay particular
attention to include engine oil, automatic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant
and cooling system fluid. Brake condition is another important item to
frequently check. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review these items
before you start your trip. Don’t forget
to also maintain your trailer and
hitch. Follow the maintenance schedule that accompanied your trailer and
check it periodically. Preferably, conduct the check at the start of each
day’s driving. Most importantly, all
hitch nuts and bolts should be tight.
CAUTION
To prevent vehicle damage:
• Due to higher load during
trailer usage, overheating
might occur on hot days or
during uphill driving. If the
coolant gauge indicates overheating, switch off the air conditioner and stop the vehicle
in a safe area to cool down the
engine.
• When towing check automatic
transaxle fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with an air conditioner, you
should install a condenser fan
to improve engine performance when towing a trailer.
5-77
5
Driving your vehicle
Ready to leave after parking on
a hill
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE WEIGHT
Two labels on your driver’s door sill
show how much weight your vehicle
was designed to carry: the Tire and
Loading Information Label and the
Certification Label.
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms
for determining your vehicle's weight
ratings, from the vehicle's specifications and the Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo Weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
5-78
GAW (Gross Axle Weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the Certification Label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the Certification Label
located on the driver’s door sill.
Overloading
WARNING
The Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) and the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) for your
vehicle are on the Certification
Label attached to the driver's
(or front passenger’s) door.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage. You can calculate the
weight of your load by weighing
the items (and people) before
putting them in the vehicle. Be
careful not to overload your
vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER .............................6-2
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING..6-3
TOWING ................................................................6-24
If the engine stalls while driving ...................................6-3
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing ........6-3
If you have a flat tire while driving ............................6-3
Towing service .................................................................6-24
Removable towing hook ...............................................6-25
Emergency towing .........................................................6-26
Tie-down hook ................................................................6-27
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START ......................6-4
EMERGENCY COMMODITY.................................6-28
If the engine doesn't turn over or turns over
slowly ..................................................................................6-4
If the engine turns over normally but doesn't
start .....................................................................................6-4
Fire extinguisher ............................................................6-28
First aid kit ......................................................................6-28
Triangle reflector ...........................................................6-28
Tire pressure gauge .......................................................6-28
JUMP STARTING ...................................................6-5
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS ................................6-8
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) ..................................................................6-10
Low tire pressure telltale ..............................................6-11
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator .....................................................6-12
Changing a tire with TPMS...........................................6-13
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE ................................6-16
Jack and tools .................................................................6-16
Changing tires .................................................................6-17
Jack label...........................................................................6-22
EC declaration of conformity for Jack ......................6-23
6
What to do in an emergency
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
OLMB063020
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme
caution
when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
To turn the hazard warning flasher
on or off, press the hazard warning
flasher button with the ignition switch
in any position. The button is located
in the center console switch panel.
All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.
6-2
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls while driving
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, if safe to do so, move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
and then push the vehicle to a safe
location.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
• Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
When the vehicle has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on firm, level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
• When the vehicle is stopped, press
the hazard warning flasher button,
move the shift lever into P (Park,
for automatic transaxle vehicle) or
neutral (for manual transaxle vehicle), apply the parking brake, and
place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
• Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
• When changing a flat tire, follow
the instructions provided later in
this chapter.
What to do in an emergency
• Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
• Turn on your hazard warning flasher.
• Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, we recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing
6
6-3
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If the engine doesn't turn over
or turns over slowly
If the engine turns over normally but doesn’t start
• Be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) if it is an automatic transaxle vehicle. The engine
starts only when the shift lever is in
N (Neutral) or P (Park).
• Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
• Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is drained.
Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could cause damage to
your vehicle. See instructions for
"Jump Starting" provided in this
chapter.
• Check the fuel level and add fuel if
necessary.
If the engine still does not start, we
recommend that you call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
WARNING
Push or pull starting the vehicle
may cause the catalytic converter to overload which can
lead to damage to the emission
control system.
6-4
JUMP STARTING
WARNING
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions
carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always
present in battery cells,
is highly combustible,
and may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
(Continued)
6-5
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Follow the jump
starting procedure in this section to
avoid serious injury or damage to
your vehicle. If in doubt about how to
properly jump start your vehicle, we
strongly recommend that you have a
service technician or towing service
do it for you.
6
What to do in an emergency
(Continued)
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these components with the engine running
or when the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
• Do not allow the (+) and (-)
jumper cables to touch. It may
cause sparks.
• The battery may rupture or
explode when you jump start
with a low or frozen battery.
6-6
CAUTION
To prevent damage to your vehicle:
• Only use a 12-volt power supply (battery or jumper system)
to jump start your vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle by push-starting.
✽ NOTICE
Pb
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
Jump starting procedure
1.Position the vehicles close enough
that the jumper cables will reach,
but do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
2.Avoid fans or any moving parts in
the engine compartment at all
times, even when the vehicles are
turned off.
3.Turn off all electrical devices such
as radios, lights, air conditioning,
etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park, for
automatic transaxle vehicle) or
neutral (for manual transaxle vehicle), and set the parking brakes.
Turn both vehicles OFF.
Jumper Cables
(+)
Jumper Terminal
(+)
Booster Battery
OLMB063002/Q
4.Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one jumper
cable to the red, positive (+)
jumper terminal of your vehicle (1).
5.Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the red, positive
(+) battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
6.Connect the second jumper cable
to the black, negative (-)
battery/chassis ground of the
assisting vehicle (3).
If your vehicle will not start after a
few attempts, it probably requires
servicing. In this event please seek
qualified assistance. If the cause of
your battery discharging is not
apparent, we recommend that your
vehicle be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Disconnect the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order you connected
them:
1.Disconnect the jumper cable from
the black, negative (-) chassis
ground of your vehicle (4).
2.Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the black, negative (-) battery/chassis ground of
the assisting vehicle (3).
3.Disconnect the second jumper
cable from the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).
4.Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the red, positive
(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
6-7
What to do in an emergency
(-)
(-)
7.Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your
vehicle (4).
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct
battery or jumper terminals or the
correct ground. Do not lean over
the battery when making connections.
8.Start the engine of the assisting
vehicle and let it run at approximately 2,000 rpm for a few minutes. Then start your vehicle.
6
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine may be overheating. If this happens, you should:
1.Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2.Place the shift lever in P (Park, for
automatic transaxle vehicle) or
neutral (for manual transaxle vehicle) and set the parking brake. If
the air conditioning is ON, turn it
OFF.
3.If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is coming out from the hood, stop the
engine. Do not open the hood until
the coolant has stopped running or
the steaming has stopped. If there
is no visible loss of engine coolant
and no steam, leave the engine
running and check to be sure the
engine cooling fan is operating. If
the fan is not running, turn the
engine off.
6-8
WARNING
While the engine is
running, keep hands,
clothing and tools
away from the moving parts such as the
cooling fan and drive
belt to prevent serious injury.
4.Check for coolant leaking from the
radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had
been in use, it is normal for cold
water to be draining from it when
you stop.)
5.If engine coolant is leaking out,
stop the engine immediately and
we recommend that you call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
WARNING
NEVER remove the
radiator cap or the
drain plug while the
engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure, causing serious
injury.
Turn the engine off and wait
until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a
thick towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to the
first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the
cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.
CAUTION
• Serious loss of coolant indicates a leak in the cooling
system and we recommend
the system be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• When the engine overheats
from low engine coolant, suddenly adding engine coolant
may cause cracks in the
engine. To prevent damage,
add engine coolant slowly in
small quantities.
What to do in an emergency
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again,
we recommend that you call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
6
6-9
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS, IF EQUIPPED)
OEL063012
Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
6-10
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
Low tire pressure
telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicator is illuminated, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If the telltale illuminates, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach a
service station or if the tire cannot
hold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the spare tire.
Then the Low Tire Pressure telltale
may flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated after restarting and about
20 minutes of continuous driving
before you have the low pressure tire
repaired and replaced on the vehicle.
CAUTION
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may be
illuminated if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased
temperature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
6-11
What to do in an emergency
✽ NOTICE
If the TPMS indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or engine is running, or if it
comes on after blinking for approximately one minute, we recommend
that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
6
What to do in an emergency
WARNING
Low pressure damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pressure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
6-12
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an under inflation warning at the same time as system failure then it will illuminate the
TPMS malfunction indicator.
We recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
CAUTION
• The TPMS malfunction indicator may be illuminated if the
vehicle is moving around
electric power supply cables
or radios transmitter such as
at police stations, government
and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indicator may illuminate if snow
chains or some separately
purchased devices such as
notebook computers, mobile
charger, remote starter, navigation etc. are used in the
vehicle. This can interfere with
normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
Changing a tire with TPMS
CAUTION
We recommend that you use a
puncture-repairing
agent
approved by HYUNDAI.
The sealant on the tire pressure
sensor and wheel shall be eleminated when you replace the tire
with a new one.
If the indicator is not extinguished
after a few minutes of driving, We
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
CAUTION
If original mounted tire is
replaced with the spare tire, the
TPMS sensor on the replaced
spare wheel should be initiated
and we recommend that the
TPMS sensor on the original
mounted wheel be deactivated
by a HYUNDAI dealer. If the
TPMS sensor on the original
mounted wheel located in the
spare tire carrier still activates,
the tire pressure monitoring
system may not operate properly. We recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
6-13
What to do in an emergency
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure will come on. We recommend that the flat tire be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you have your tires
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Even if you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure Telltale will blink or remain
on until the low pressure tire is
repaired and placed on the vehicle.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure Telltale may blink or illuminate after a few minutes because the
TPMS sensor mounted on the spare
wheel is not initiated.
Once the low pressure tire is reinflated to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle or we
recommend that the TPMS sensor
mounted on the replaced spare
wheel be initiated by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer, the TPMS malfunction indicator and the low tire
pressure telltale will extinguish within
a few minutes of driving.
6
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able to identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
CAUTION
We recommend that you use the
tire sealant approved by
HYUNDAI if your vehicle is
equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. The liquid
sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensors.
6-14
WARNING
WARNING
TPMS
Protecting TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.
severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING
For Europe
may interfere with the TPMS
function.
• The wheels on the market do
not have a TPMS sensor.
For your safety, we recommend that you use parts for
replacement from an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If you use the wheels on the
market, use a TPMS sensor
approved by a HYUNDAI dealer. If your vehicle is not
equipped with a TPMS sensor
or TPMS does not work properly, you may fail the periodic
vehicle inspection conducted
in your country.
(Continued)
What to do in an emergency
• Do not modify the vehicle, it
(Continued)
❈All vehicles sold in the
EUROPE market during below
period must be equipped with
TPMS.
- New model vehicle : Nov. 1,
2012 ~
- Current model vehicle : Nov.
1, 2014~ (Based on vehicle
registrations)
6
6-15
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
WARNING
Jack and tools
Changing a tire can be dangerous. Follow the instructions in
this section when changing a
tire to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death.
OLMB063004
OLMB063003
➀ Jack handle
➁ Jack
➂ Wheel lug nut wrench
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment under the luggage box
cover.
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
6-16
Remove the lock (1, if equipped) by
pulling it out. Turn the winged hold
down bolt (2) counterclockwise to
remove the spare tire.
Store the spare tire in the same compartment by turning the winged hold
down bolt (2) clockwise. Insert the
lock (1, if equipped) in to secure the
tire in place.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling,” store them in their
proper location.
Changing tires
WARNING
Follow these steps to change your
vehicle’s tire:
1.Park on a level, firm surface.
2.Move the shift lever into P (Park,
for automatic transaxle vehicle) or
neutral (for manual transaxle vehicle), apply the parking brake, and
place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
3.Press the hazard warning flasher
button.
4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5.Block both the front and rear of the
tire diagonally opposite of the tire
you are changing.
6-17
What to do in an emergency
A vehicle can slip or roll off of a
jack causing serious injury or
death to you or those nearby.
Take the following safety precautions:
• Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
• NEVER attempt to change a
tire in the lane of traffic.
ALWAYS move the vehicle
completely off the road on
level, firm ground away from
traffic before trying to change
a tire. If you cannot find a
level, firm place off the road,
call a towing service for assistance.
• Be sure to use the jack provided with the vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• ALWAYS place the jack on the
designated jacking positions
on the vehicle and NEVER on
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jacking support.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Keep children away from the
road and the vehicle.
6
What to do in an emergency
OLMB063007
OLMB063008
OLMB063009
6.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each in the
order shown above, but do not
remove any lug nuts until the tire
has been raised off of the ground.
7.Place the jack at the designated
jacking position under the frame
closest to the tire you are changing. The jacking positions are
plates welded to the frame with two
tabs and a raised dot. Never jack
any other position or part of the
vehicle.
8.Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Make sure the vehicle is
stable on the jack.
6-18
OLMB063010
13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Double-check each lug
nut until they are tight. After
changing tires, we recommend
that an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer tighten the lug nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possible. The wheel lug nut should
be tightened to 9~11 kg.m
(65~79 lb.ft).
If you have a tire gauge, check the
tire pressure (see “Tires and Wheels”
in chapter 8 for tire pressure instructions.). If the pressure is lower or
higher than recommended, drive
slowly to the nearest service station
and adjust it to the recommended
pressure. Always reinstall the valve
cap after checking or adjusting tire
pressure. If the cap is not replaced,
air may leak from the tire. If you lose
a valve cap, buy another and install it
as soon as possible. After changing
tires, secure the flat tire and return
the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.
What to do in an emergency
9.Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel
lug nut wrench and remove them
with your fingers. Remove the
wheel from the studs and lay it flat
on the ground out of the way.
Remove any dirt or debris from the
studs, mounting surfaces, and
wheel.
10. Install the spare tire onto the
studs of the hub.
11. Tighten the lug nuts with your fingers onto the studs with the
smaller end of the lug nuts closest to the wheel.
12. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
✽ NOTICE
6
Check the tire pressure as soon as
possible after installing a spare tire.
Adjust it to the recommended pressure.
6-19
What to do in an emergency
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the studs and lug nuts. Make
certain during tire changing
that the same nuts that were
removed are reinstalled. If you
have to replace your lug nuts
make sure they have metric
threads to avoid damaging the
studs and ensure the wheel is
properly secured to the hub. We
recommend that you consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
If any of the equipment such as the
jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equipment is damaged or in poor condition, do not attempt to change the
tire and call for assistance.
6-20
Use of compact spare tires
(if equipped)
Compact spare tires are designed for
emergency use only. Drive carefully
on the compact spare tire and
always follow the safety precautions.
WARNING
To prevent compact spare tire
failure and loss of control possibly resulting in an accident:
• Use the compact spare tire
only in an emergency.
• NEVER operate your vehicle
over 80 km/h (50 mph).
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s
maximum load rating or the
load carrying capacity shown
on the sidewall of the compact spare tire.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire continuously. Repair or
replace the original tire as
soon as possible to avoid failure of the compact spare tire.
When driving with the compact spare
tire mounted to your vehicle:
• Check the tire pressure after
installing the compact spare tire.
The compact spare tire should be
inflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the compact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire is installed.
✽ NOTICE
CAUTION
To prevent damaging the compact spare tire and your vehicle:
• Drive slowly enough for the
road conditions to avoid all
hazards, such as a potholes
or debris.
• Avoid driving over obstacles.
The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and
reduces the ground clearance
approximately 25 mm (1 in).
• Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare tire. Because
of the smaller size, a tire chain
will not fit properly.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow
tires, wheel covers or trim
rings be used with the compact spare wheel.
What to do in an emergency
When the original tire and wheel are
repaired and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nut torque must be set
correctly to prevent wheel vibration.
The correct lug nut tightening
torque is 9-11 kg.m (65-79 lb.ft).
6
6-21
What to do in an emergency
Jack label
■ Example
• Type A
OHYK064001
• Type B
OHYK064005
• Type C
OHYK064002
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
6-22
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transaxle or move the
shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transaxle.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
EC declaration of conformity for Jack
What to do in an emergency
6
JACKDOC14S
6-23
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
Towing service
Dolly
Dolly
OLMB063011
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial
tow-truck
service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.
6-24
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground. If any of the loaded
wheels or suspension components
are damaged or the vehicle is being
towed with the front wheels on the
ground, use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
For 4WD vehicles, it must be towed
with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment with all the wheels off the
ground.
OLMB063012
OLMB063013
CAUTION
A 4WD vehicle should never be
towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transaxle or the
4WD system.
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle with
the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use a wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
WARNING
Removable towing hook
■ Front
OLMB063014
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies:
1.Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position.
2.Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3.Release the parking brake.
■ Rear
6
CAUTION
Failure to place the shift lever in
N (Neutral) when being towed
with the front wheels on the
ground can cause internal damage to the transaxle.
What to do in an emergency
If your vehicle is equipped with
a rollover sensor, place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF or
ACC position when the vehicle
is being towed. The side impact
and curtain air bag may deploy
if the sensor detects the situation as a rollover.
3.Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4.Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
OLMB063015
1.Open the tailgate, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2.Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front or rear bumper.
6-25
What to do in an emergency
Emergency towing
■ Front
OLMB063016
■ Rear
OLMB063017
If towing is necessary, we recommend you have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
6-26
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency towing hook at the front (or rear) of the
vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle with a cable or chain. A
driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
Always follow these emergency towing precautions:
• Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position so the steering
wheel is not locked.
• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced braking performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steering system will be disabled.
• Use a vehicle heavier than your
own to tow your vehicle.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
CAUTION
• Use a towing cable or chain less
than 5 m (16 feet) long. Attach a
white or red cloth (about 30 cm (12
inches) wide) in the middle of the
cable or chain for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so the towing cable
or chain remains tight during towing.
• Before towing, check the automatic transaxle for fluid leaks under
your vehicle. If the automatic
transaxle fluid is leaking, flatbed
equipment or a towing dolly must
be used.
OLMB033091
WARNING
Do not use the tie-down hook(s)
for towing purposes. If the tiedown hook(s) are used for towing, the tie-down hook(s) or
bumper will be damaged and
this could lead to serious injury.
6-27
What to do in an emergency
OLMB063019
To avoid damage to your vehicle
and vehicle components when
towing:
• Always pull straight ahead
when using the towing hooks.
Do not pull from the side or at
a vertical angle.
• Do not use the towing hooks
to pull a vehicle out of mud,
sand or other conditions from
which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own
power.
• Limit the vehicle speed to
15 km/h (10 mph) and drive
less than 1.5 km (1 mile) when
towing to avoid serious damage
to
the
automatic
transaxle.
Tie-down hook
6
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle is equipped with emergency commodities to help you
respond to emergency situation.
First aid kit
Supplies for use in giving first aid
such as scissors, bandage and
adhesive tape, etc. are provided.
Fire extinguisher
If there is small fire and you know
how to use the fire extinguisher, follow these steps carefully.
1.Pull out the safety pin at the top of
the extinguisher that keeps the
handle from being accidentally
pressed.
2.Aim the nozzle towards the base of
the fire.
3.Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft)
away from the fire and squeeze the
handle to discharge the extinguisher. If you release the handle, the
discharge will stop.
4.Sweep the nozzle back and forth at
the base of the fire. After the fire
appears to be out, watch carefully
since it may re-ignite.
6-28
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the
road to warn oncoming vehicles during emergencies, such as when the
vehicle is parked by the roadside due
to problems.
Tire pressure gauge
(if equipped)
Tires normally lose some air in dayto-day use, and you may have to add
a air periodically and usually it is not
a sign of a leaking tire, but of normal
wear. Always check tire pressure
when the tires are cold because tire
pressure increases with temperature.
To check the tire pressure, take the
following steps:
1.Unscrew the inflation valve cap
that is located on the rim of the tire.
2.Press and hold the gauge against
the tire valve. Some air will leak as
you begin and more will leak if you
don't press the gauge in firmly.
3.A firm non-leaking push will activate the gauge.
4.Read the tire pressure on the
gauge to see whether the tire pressure is low or high.
5.Adjust the tire pressure to the
specified pressure. Refer to “Tires
and Wheels” in chapter 8.
6.Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT.......................................7-3
MAINTENANCE SERVICES.....................................7-5
FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)................................7-39
Draining water from fuel filter....................................7-39
Fuel filter cartridge replacement................................7-39
Owner's responsibility......................................................7-5
Owner maintenance precautions ..................................7-5
AIR CLEANER ........................................................7-40
OWNER MAINTENANCE ........................................7-8
Filter replacement ........................................................7-40
Owner maintenance schedule........................................7-8
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER .........................7-42
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE ..............7-10
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
ITEMS.....................................................................7-24
ENGINE OIL ...........................................................7-28
Filter inspection...............................................................7-42
Filter replacement...........................................................7-42
WIPER BLADES.....................................................7-44
Checking the engine oil level ....................................7-28
Changing the engine oil and filter..............................7-30
BATTERY ...............................................................7-47
Checking the coolant level ...........................................7-31
Changing the coolant .....................................................7-33
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID........................................7-34
Checking the brake/clutch fluid level ......................7-34
POWER STEERING FLUID ...................................7-36
Checking the power steering fluid level .................7-36
Checking the power steering hose.............................7-36
WASHER FLUID.....................................................7-37
Checking the washer fluid level ...............................7-37
PARKING BRAKE...................................................7-38
Checking the parking brake .........................................7-38
For best battery service................................................7-47
Battery capacity label....................................................7-49
Battery recharging .........................................................7-49
Reset items .......................................................................7-50
TIRES AND WHEELS ............................................7-51
Tire care ............................................................................7-51
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures.............7-51
Checking tire inflation pressure ..................................7-53
Tire rotation .....................................................................7-54
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..............................7-55
Tire replacement .............................................................7-55
Wheel replacement .........................................................7-57
Tire traction......................................................................7-57
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT................................................7-31
Blade inspection ..............................................................7-44
Blade replacement .......................................................7-44
7
Tire maintenance ...........................................................7-57
Tire sidewall labeling......................................................7-57
Low aspect ratio tire ......................................................7-62
FUSES ....................................................................7-63
Fuse/Relay panel description ......................................7-68
LIGHT BULBS ........................................................7-81
Headlamp, position lamp, Front turn signal lamp,
front fog lamp bulb replacement ................................7-82
Side repeater lamp replacement ................................7-84
Rear combination lamp bulb replacement ................7-85
High mounted stop lamp replacement ....................7-87
License plate lamp bulb replacement .......................7-87
Interior lamp bulb replacement ...................................7-88
APPEARANCE CARE.............................................7-89
Exterior care ....................................................................7-89
Interior care......................................................................7-95
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM............................7-97
7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline Engine (NU 2.0) - MPI
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
Maintenance
■ Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.4L) - MPI
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
(if equipped)
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
7
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OLMB073001/OLMB073094
7-3
Maintenance
■ Diesel Engine (R2.0)
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Power steering fluid reservoir
(if equipped)
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
12. Fuel filter (if equipped)
* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OLMB073066
7-4
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
Owner maintenance precautions
✽ NOTICE
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
✽ NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Service Passport provided with the vehicle. If you're
unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, we recommend
that the system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAIdealer.
Maintenance
We recommend in general that you
have your vehicle serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered when your vehicle is
covered by warranty.
7
7-5
Maintenance
WARNING
Maintenance work
• Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be dangerous. You can be seriously
injured while performing
some maintenance procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or
the proper tools and equipment to do the work, we recommend that the system be
serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Working under the hood with
the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even more
dangerous when you wear
jewelry or loose clothing.
(Continued)
7-6
(Continued)
These can become entangled
in moving parts and result in
injury. Therefore, if you must
run the engine while working
under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry
(especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and
all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling fans.
CAUTION
• Do not put heavy objects or
•
•
•
•
apply excessive force on top
of the engine cover (if
equipped) or fuel related
parts.
When you inspect the fuel
system (fuel lines and fuel
injection devices), we recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not drive long time with
the engine cover (if equipped)
removed.
When checking the engine
room, do not go near fire.
Fuel, washer fluid, etc. are
flammable oils that may cause
fire.
Before touching the battery,
ignition cables and electrical
wiring, you should disconnect
the battery "-" terminal. You
may get an electric shock
from the electric current.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When you remove the interior
trim cover with a flat head (-)
driver, be careful not to damage the cover.
• Be careful when you replace
and clean bulbs to avoid
burns or electrical shock.
Engine compartment precautions (Diesel engine)
Diesel Engine
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off
engine. High-pressure pump,
rail, injectors and high-pressure
pipes are subject to high pressure even after the engine
stopped. The fuel jet produced
by fuel leaks may cause serious
injury, if it touches the body.
People
using
pacemakers
should not move than 30cm
closer to the ECU or wiring harness within the engine room
while engine is running, since
the high currents in the electronic engine control system
produce considerable magnetic
fields.
7-7
Maintenance
• The piezo injector operates at high
voltage
(maximum
200v).
Therefore, the following accidents
may occur.
- Direct contact with the injector or
injector wiring may cause electric
shock or damage your muscle or
nerve system.
- The electromagnetic wave from
the operating injector may cause
the artificial heart pacemaker to
malfunction.
• Follow the safety tips provided
below, when you are checking the
engine room while the engine is
running.
- Do not touch the injector, injector
wirings, and the engine computer
while the engine is running.
- Do not remove the injector connector while the engine is running.
- People using pacemakers must
not go near the engine while the
engine is starting or running.
WARNING
7
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be performed at the frequencies indicated
to help ensure safe, dependable
operation of your vehicle.
If you have any question, we recommend that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure. This could
cause burns or other serious
injury.
7-8
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straightahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check manual transaxle operation,
including clutch operation.
• Check automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
At least monthly:
• Check radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks,
and hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid
level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake (and clutch) fluid
level.
Maintenance
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
7
7-9
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow
Normal
Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the following
conditions
apply,
follow
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 32°C (90°F).
7-10
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After the
periods or distance shown in the
chart, continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - GASOLINE ENGINE
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
MAINTENANCE
Number of months or driving distance, whichever
INTERVALS Months
12
24
36
48
60
Miles×1,000
10
20
30
40
50
Km×1,000
15
30
45
60
75
Drive belts *1
Except Europe
Engine oil and engine oil filter *2
I
R
R
For China
For Middle East
I
R
R
I
R
R
I
R
R
Replace every 5,000 km or 6 months
Replace every 10,000 km or 12 months *3
For China, India,
Middle East
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Except China,
India, Middle
East
I
I
R
I
I
R
I
I
Maintenance
Air cleaner filter
96
80
120
At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
For Europe
Except China &
Middle East
comes first
72
84
60
70
90
105
7
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*1 : Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped). Inspect and if necessary correct or replace.
*2 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
*3 : Driving in summer season temperature over 40 °C (104 °F - SAUDI, UAE, OMAN, KUWAIT, BAHRAIN, QATAR, IRAN, YEMEN
ETC) or driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h) must conform the severe driving condition.
7-11
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - GASOLINE ENGINE
MAINTENANCE
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
INTERVALS Months
96
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
80
Miles×1,000
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
MAINTENANCE
120
ITEM
Km×1,000
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
For Europe
Add every 15,000 km or 12 months
Fuel additives *4
Except Europe
Add every 5,000 km or 6 months
2.0 MPI
Replace every 160,000 km (100,000 miles) or 144 months
Spark plugs
2.4 MPI
Replace every 40,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months
5
Valve clearance *
2.4 MPI
I
I
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
I
I
For Europe
I
Fuel tank air filter (if equipped)
R
Except Europe
I
R
I
I
Vacuum hose (for EGR & throttle body) (if equipped)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*4 : If good quality gasolines that meet Europe Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one
bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how
to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*5 : Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer should perform the operation.
7-12
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - GASOLINE ENGINE
MAINTENANCE
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
INTERVALS Months
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
Miles×1,000
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Km×1,000
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
120
I
For Europe
I
Fuel filter *6
R
Except Europe
I
R
I
Fuel lines, hoses and connections
I
I
Inspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day
Cooling system
At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
At first, replace at 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years:
after that, replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months *8
Except Europe
At first, replace at 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years:
after that, replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24 months *8
Engine coolant *7
Battery condition
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*6 : The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule
depends on fuel quality. If there are some important matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
details.
*7 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*8 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to its interval when you do maintenance of other items.
7-13
Maintenance
For Europe
7
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - GASOLINE ENGINE
MAINTENANCE
Number of months or driving distance, whichever
INTERVALS Months
12
24
36
48
60
Miles×1,000
10
20
30
40
50
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Km×1,000
15
30
45
60
75
All electrical systems
I
I
Brake lines, hoses and connections
I
I
I
I
I
Brake pedal, Clutch pedal (if equipped)
I
I
I
Parking brake
I
I
For Europe
I
R
I
R
I
Brake/Clutch fluid
Except Europe
I
I
I
I
I
Disc brakes and pads
I
I
I
I
I
Power steering fluid and hoses
I
I
I
I
I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I
I
I
I
I
Driveshaft and boots
I
I
Tire (pressure & tread wear)
I
I
I
I
I
Front suspension ball joints
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
7-14
comes first
72
84
60
70
90
105
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
96
80
120
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - GASOLINE ENGINE
96
80
120
I
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*9 : Manual transaxle fluid, transfer case oil and differential oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
7-15
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
INTERVALS Months
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
Miles×1,000
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Km×1,000
15
30
45
60
75
90
105
Bolt and nuts on chassis and body
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner compressor (if equipped)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
For Europe
R
R
R
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
Except Europe
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
9
Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *
I
Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
No check, No service required
Transfer case oil (4WD) *9
I
9
Rear differential oil (4WD) *
I
Propeller shaft (if equipped)
I
I
I
Exhaust system
I
I
I
7
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - GASOLINE ENGINE
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Except China &
Middle East
Engine oil and engine oil
filter
For China
Maintenance intervals
Driving condition
Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or 6 months
R
For Middle East
Every 5,000 km or 6 months
A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, K
Every 5,000 km or 6 months
Replace more frequently depending on the
condition
Replace more frequently depending on the
condition
Air cleaner filter
R
Spark plugs
R
Rear differential oil (4WD)
R
Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
C, D, E, G, I, K, H
Transfer case oil (4WD)
R
Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
C, D, E, G, I, K, H
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I
Propeller shaft (if equipped)
I
Front suspension ball joints
I
7-16
Inspect more frequently depending on the
condition
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12
months
Inspect more frequently depending on the
condition
C, E
B, H
C, D, E, F, G
C, E
C, D, E, F, G
Maintenance
operation
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors
I
Parking brake
I
Driveshaft and boots
I
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
R
Manual transaxle fluid
R
Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
For Europe
R
Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles)
Except Europe
R
Every 100,000 km (62,000 miles)
Maintenance intervals
Inspect more frequently depending on the
condition
Inspect more frequently depending on the
condition
Inspect more frequently depending on the
condition
Replace more frequently depending on the
condition
Automatic transaxle fluid
Driving condition
C, D, E, G, H
C, D, G, H
C, D, E, F, H
C, E
C, D, E, G, H, I, K
A, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, K
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving in dusty, rough roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive
materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot
weather above 32°C (90°F)
G: Driving in mountainous areas
H : Towing a trailer
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle
towing
J : Driving over 140 km/h (87 mile/h)
K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
L : Frequently driving in stop and go condition
7-17
Maintenance
Maintenance item
7
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
MAINTENANCE
Number of months or driving distance, whichever
INTERVALS Months
24
48
72
96
120
Miles×1,000
20
40
60
80
100
Km×1,000
30
60
90
120
150
At first, inspect 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Except Europe
At first, inspect 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12 months
For Europe
For Russia
Except Europe
For China, India,
Middle East
Air cleaner filter
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
192
160
240
For Europe
Drive belts *1
Engine oil and engine oil filter *2
comes first
144
168
120
140
180
210
Except China,
India, Middle
East
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Replace every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Replace every 10,000 km (6,000 miles) or 12 months
R
Replace every 15,000 km (10,000 miles)
Inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12 months,
and replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24 months
Inspect every 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*1 : Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped). Inspect and if necessary correct or replace. Inspect drive belt tentioner, idler and alternator, pulley and if necessary correct or replace.
*2 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.
7-18
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (CONT.)
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
MAINTENANCE
Number of months or driving distance, whichever
INTERVALS Months
24
48
72
96
120
Miles×1,000
20
40
60
80
100
Km×1,000
30
60
90
120
150
comes first
144
168
120
140
180
210
For Europe *3
Inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months,
and replace every 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
Except Europe *4
Inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months,
and replace every 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
Fuel filter cartridge
Fuel lines, hoses and connections
192
160
240
Inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Inspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day
R : Replace or change.
Maintenance
*3 : This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or equivalent">.
If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the EN590, it must be replaced more frequently.
7
Cooling system
At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
after that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc., replace
the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*4 : This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or equivalent">.
If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. HYUNDAI recommends "every
7,500km inspection, every 15,000km replacement".
If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc., replace
the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
7-19
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (CONT.)
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
MAINTENANCE
Number of months or driving distance, whichever
INTERVALS Months
24
48
72
96
120
Miles×1,000
20
40
60
80
100
Km×1,000
30
60
90
120
150
At first, replace at 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years
after that, replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months *6
Except Europe
At first, replace at 200,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years:
after that, replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24 months *6
Battery condition
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Parking brake
Disc brakes and pads
Power steering fluid and hoses
192
160
240
For Europe
Engine coolant *5
Brake/clutch fluid
comes first
144
168
120
140
180
210
I
I
For Europe
Except Europe
I
I
Inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months *6
Inspect every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12 months
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*5 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at
the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*6 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to its interval when you do maintenance of other items.
7-20
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (CONT.)
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
192
160
240
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
R : Replace or change.
*7 : Manual transaxle fluid, transfer case oil and differential oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
7-21
Maintenance
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first
Months
24
48
72
96
120
144
168
Miles×1,000
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Km×1,000
30
60
90
120
150
180
210
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Drive shaft and boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Tire (pressure & tread wear)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front suspension ball joints
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
For Europe
Replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
Except Europe
Replace every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *7
Inspect every 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
No check, No service required
Transfer case oil (4WD) *7
I
I
I
Rear differential oil (4WD) *7
I
I
I
Propeller shaft (if equipped)
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - DIESEL ENGINE
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance
operation
Maintenance intervals
For Europe
R
Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 6 months
Except Europe
R
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months
Air cleaner filter
R
Replace more frequently depending on the
condition
C, E
Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
R
Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
C, D, E, G, H, I, K
Maintenance item
Engine oil and engine oil
filter
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
For Europe
Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles)
R
Except Europe
Every 100,000 km (62,000 miles)
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I
Propeller shaft (if equipped)
I
Front suspension ball joints
I
7-22
Inspect more frequently depending on the
condition
Every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12
months
Inspect more frequently depending on the
condition
Driving condition
A, B, C, F, G, H,
I, J, K, L
A, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, K
C, D, E, F, G
C, E
C, D, E, F, G
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors
I
Parking brake
I
Drive shaft and boots
I
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
R
Rear differential oil (4WD)
R
Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
C, D, E, G, I, K, H
Transfer case oil (4WD)
R
Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
C, D, E, G, I, K, H
Maintenance intervals
Driving condition
Inspect more frequently depending on the
C, D, E, G, H
condition
Inspect more frequently depending on the
C, D, G, H
condition
Inspect more frequently depending on the
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
condition
Replace more frequently depending on the
C, E, G
condition
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving in dusty, rough roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive
materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot
weather above 32 °C (90 °F)
G: Driving in mountainous areas.
H : Towing a trailer or using a camper on roof rack
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle
towing
J : Driving in very cold weather
K : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
7-23
Maintenance
Severe driving conditions
7
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
Fuel filter (cartridge)
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
engine for several minutes, and
check for leaks at the connections.
We recommend that the fuel filter be
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
CAUTION
When you are inspecting the
belt, place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF or ACC position.
7-24
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and damage. We recommend that the fuel
lines, fuel hoses and connections be
replaced by an authoized HYUNDAI
dealer.
WARNING
Diesel only
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off
engine. High pressure pump,
rail, injectors and high pressure
pipes are subject to high pressure even after the engine
stopped. The fuel jet produced
by fuel leaks may cause serious
injury, if it touch the body.
People
using
pacemakers
should not move than 30cm
closer to the ECU or wiring harness within the engine room
while engine is running, since
the high currents in the
Common Rail system produce
considerable magnetic fields.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
We recommend that the air cleaner
filter be replaced by an authoized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Spark plugs
(for gasoline engine)
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
WARNING
Do not disconnect and inspect
spark plugs when the engine is
hot. You may burn yourself.
Valve clearance
(for gasoline engine)
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary. We recommend that the system
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
7-25
Maintenance
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving component which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter
7
Maintenance
Cooling system
Check the cooling system parts,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
7-26
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transaxle fluid should not
be checked under normal usage
conditions.
We recommend that the automatic
transaxle fluid changed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the maintenance schedule.
✽ NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
It is normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Power steering pump, belt and
hoses
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
For more information on checking
the pads or lining wear limit, refer to
the HYUNDAI web site.
(http://brakemanual.hmc.co.kr)
Check the power steering pump and
hoses for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately. Inspect the power
steering belt (or drive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive
wear, oiliness and proper tension.
Replace or adjust it if necessary.
Suspension mounting bolts
Drive shafts and boots
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake lever (or
pedal) and cables.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Air conditioning refrigerant/
compressor
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.
7-27
Maintenance
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on
the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Brake pads, calipers and
rotors
7
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
■ Type A
OLMB073096
■ Type B
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
WARNING
Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
OLMB073095
■ Type C
OLMB073003
7-28
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
CAUTION
• Do not overfill the engine oil.
It may damage the engine.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine
oil. If you drop the engine oil
on the engine room, wipe it off
immediately.
• When you wipe the oil level
gauge, you should wipe it with
a clean cloth. When mixed
with debris, it can cause
engine damage.
CAUTION
■ Type A
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in section 8.)
Diesel engine
Overfilling the engine oil may
cause severe dieseling due to
churning effect. It may lead to
engine damage accompanied
with abrupt engine speed increment, combustion noise and
white smoke emission.
OLMB073097
■ Type B
Maintenance
OLMB073106
■ Type C
7
OLMB073004
7-29
Maintenance
Changing the engine oil and
filter
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time. Used
engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
your skin by washing your
hands thoroughly with soap
and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.
We recommend that the engine oil
and filter be replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
7-30
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant concentration level at least
once a year, at the beginning of the
winter season, and before traveling
to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the
CAUTION
• When the engine overheats
Maintenance
from low engine coolant, suddenly adding engine coolant
may cause cracks in the
engine. To prevent damage,
add engine coolant slowly in
small quantities.
• Do not drive with no engine
coolant. It may cause water
pump failure and engine
seizure, etc.
radiator cap while the engine
is operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage and could
result in serious personal
injury from escaping hot
coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait
until it cools down. Use
extreme care when removing
the radiator cap. Wrap a thick
towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while
the pressure is released from
the cooling system.
(Continued)
(Continued)
When you are sure all the
pressure has been released,
press down on the cap, using
a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
• Even if the engine is not operating, do not remove the radiator cap or the drain plug
while the engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant and
steam may still blow out
under pressure, causing serious injury.
7
7-31
Maintenance
Recommended engine coolant
WARNING
The electric motor
(cooling fan) is controlled by engine
coolant temperature,
refrigerant pressure
and vehicle speed. It may sometimes operate even when the
engine is not running. Use
extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling
fan so that you are not injured
by a rotating fan blades. As the
engine coolant temperature
decreases, the electric motor
will automatically shut off. This
is a normal condition.
The electric motor (cooling fan)
may operate until you disconnect the negative battery cable.
7-32
OLMB073005
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks
on the side of the coolant reservoir
when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) or soft water.
Bring the level to F (MAX), but do not
overfill.
If frequent additions are required, we
recommend that the system be
inspected
by
an
authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycolbased coolant to prevent corrosion
and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
Changing the coolant
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
Ambient
Temperature
-15°C (5°F)
-25°C (-13°F)
-35°C (-31°F)
-45°C (-49°F)
We recommend that the coolant be
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze
35
40
50
60
Water
65
60
50
40
CAUTION
OLMB073006
Radiator cap
WARNING
Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure
causing
serious
injury.
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure
visibility
when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
7-33
Maintenance
WARNING
Put a thick cloth or fabric
around the radiator cap before
refilling the coolant in order to
prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such
as generator.
7
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Checking the brake/clutch
fluid level
OLMB073007
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean
the area around the reservoir cap
thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch
fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, we recommend that the system be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Use only the specified brake/clutch
fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING
Loss of brake/clutch fluid
In the event the brake/clutch
system requires frequent additions of fluid, we recommend
that the system be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE
Before removing the brake/clutch
filler cap, read the warning on the
cap.
WARNING
Clean filler cap before removing. Use only DOT3 or DOT4
brake/clutch fluid from a sealed
container.
7-34
WARNING
Brake/clutch fluid
When changing and adding
brake/clutch fluid, handle it
carefully. Do not let it come in
contact with your eyes. If brake/
clutch fluid should come in contact with your eyes, immediately
flush them with a large quantity
of fresh tap water. Have your
eyes examined by a doctor as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
Maintenance
Do not allow brake/clutch fluid
to contact the vehicle's body
paint, as paint damage will
result. Brake/clutch fluid, which
has been exposed to open air
for an extended time should
never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be
disposed of properly. Don't put
in the wrong kind of fluid.
A few drops of mineral-based
oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake/clutch system can damage brake/clutch system parts.
7
7-35
Maintenance
POWER STEERING FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
Checking the power steering
✽ NOTICE
fluid level
Check that the fluid level is in the
"HOT" range on the reservoir. If
the fluid is cold, check that it is in
the "COLD" range.
In the event the power steering system requires frequent additions of
fluid, we recommend that the system
be inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
OLMB073067
With the vehicle on level ground,
check the fluid level in the power
steering reservoir periodically. The
fluid should be between MAX and
MIN marks on the side of the reservoir at the normal temperature.
Before adding power steering fluid,
thoroughly clean the area around the
reservoir cap to prevent power steering fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level.
7-36
• To avoid damage to the power
steering pump, do not operate
the vehicle for prolonged periods with a low power steering
fluid level.
• Never start the engine when
the reservoir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful
that dirt does not get into the
tank.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Too little fluid can result in
increased steering effort
and/or noise from the power
steering system.
• The use of the non-specified
fluid could reduce the effectiveness of the power steering
system and cause damage to
it.
Use only the specified power steering fluid. (Refer to "Recommended
lubricants or capacities" in section
8.)
Checking the power steering
hose
Check the connections for oil leaks,
damage and twists in the power
steering hose before driving.
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
CAUTION
Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
Maintenance
OLMB073008E
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary.
Plain water may be used if washer
fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure
visibility
when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid
agents contain some amounts
of alcohol and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow sparks
or flame to contact the washer
fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or
occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is
poisonous to humans and
animals. Do not drink and
avoid contacting windshield
washer fluid. Serious injury or
death could occur.
7
7-37
Maintenance
PARKING BRAKE
Checking the parking brake
Type A
Type B
OLMB073009
OLMB053023
Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 30 kg (66 lb,
294N) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
we recommend that the system be
serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Stroke : 8~9 notch
7-38
Check the stroke of the parking
brake by counting the number of
“clicks’’ heard while fully applying it
from the released position. Also, the
parking brake alone should securely
hold the vehicle on a fairly steep
grade. If the stroke is more or less
than specified, we recommend that
the system be serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 5~6 “clicks’’ at a force of
20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).
FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)
Draining water from fuel filter
The fuel filter for diesel engine plays
an important role of separating water
from fuel and accumulating the water
in its bottom.
If water accumulates in the fuel filter,
the warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
If this warning light turned
on, we recommend that the
system be serviced by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Fuel filter cartridge replacement
If the water accumulated in the
fuel filter is not drained at proper times, damages to the major
parts such as the fuel system
can be caused by water permeation in the fuel filter.
Maintenance
OLMB073011
CAUTION
✽ NOTICE
When replacing the fuel filter cartridge, we recommend that you use
parts for replacement from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
7
7-39
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
OLMB073012
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
7-40
OLMB073013
OLMB073014
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this section.)
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• We recommend that you use
parts for replacement from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
7
7-41
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection
If the vehicle is operated in the
severely air-polluted cities or on
dusty rough roads for a long period,
it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When
you, the owner, replace the climate
control air filter, replace it performing
the following procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components.
Replace the filter according to the
maintenance Schedule.
Filter replacement
OLMB073016
OLMB073015
1. Open the glove box and remove
the support strap.
7-42
2. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides.
OBK075017
3. Remove the climate control air filter case while pressing the lock on
the right of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
Maintenance
OLMB073017
✽ NOTICE
Install a new climate control air filter in the correct direction with the
arrow symbol (↓) facing downwards.
Otherwise, the climate control effects
may decrease, possibly with a noise.
7
7-43
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
OLMB073019
✽ NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield difficult to clean.
7-44
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified
wiper blade could result in
wiper malfunction and failure.
Front windshield wiper blade
OLMB073021
OLMB073098
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
CAUTION
CAUTION
OLMB073022
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
7-45
Maintenance
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
OLMB073020
7
Maintenance
Rear window wiper blade
OLMB073099
OLMB073024
OLMB073023
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out
the wiper blade assembly.
OLMB073100
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then
pull down the blade assembly and
remove it.
3. Install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
7-46
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, we recommend that the wiper blade be
replaced by an authoized HYUNDAI
dealer.
BATTERY
For best battery service
OLMB073025
WARNING
Battery dangers
Always read the following instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes
and all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
Hydrogen, a highly combustible gas, is always
present in battery cells
and may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach
of
children
because batteries contain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
7-47
Maintenance
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.
✽ NOTICE
Basically equipped battery is maintenance free type. If your vehicle is
equipped with the battery marked
with LOWER and UPPER on the
side, you can check the electrolyte
level. The electrolyte level should be
between LOWER and UPPER. If
the electrolyte level is low, it needs to
add distilled (demineralized) water
(Never add sulfuric acid or other
electrolyte). When refill, be careful
not to splash the battery and adjacent components. And do not overfill the battery cells. It can cause corrosion on other parts. After then
ensure that tighten the cell caps. We
recommend that you contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
7
Maintenance
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets
into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean
water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate
medical attention. If electrolyte gets on your skin,
thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you
feel a pain or a burning
sensation, get medical
attention immediately.
Wear eye protection
when charging or working near a battery.
Always provide ventilation when working in an
enclosed space.
An inappropriately disposed battery can be
harmful to the environment and human health.
Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
7-48
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak, resulting in personal injury. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery
cables are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
Never touch these components with the engine running
or the ignition switched on.
Failure to follow the above
warnings can result in serious
bodily injury or death.
CAUTION
If you connect unauthorized
electronic devices to the battery, the battery may be discharged. Never use unauthorized devices.
Battery capacity label
Battery recharging
■ Example
OLMB073072
1. CMF60L-BCI : The HYUNDAI
model name of battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity (in Ampere
hours)
4. 92RC : The nominal reserve
capacity (in min.)
5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 440A : The cold-test current in
amperes by EN
WARNING
Recharging battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
an area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes,
sparks, or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin gassing (boiling)
violently or if the temperature
of the electrolyte of any cell
exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
(Continued)
7-49
Maintenance
❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for example, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
7
Maintenance
(Continued)
• Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery
terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery
terminal.
• Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories
and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected.
7-50
Reset items
Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
(See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
WARNING
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Tire underinflation
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures
OLMB073063
All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
Maintenance
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (1 mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
Severe underinflation (70 kPa
(10 psi) or more) can lead to
severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
7
7-51
Maintenance
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
• Warm tires normally exceed
Tire pressure
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread,
and a greater possibility of
damage from road hazards.
recommended cold tire pressures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (1
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause
accidents. If your tread is
badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace
them.
WARNING
Tire inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
7-52
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause accidents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pressure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehicle.
7-53
Maintenance
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
7
Maintenance
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
With a full-size spare tire (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
OLMB073074
Without a spare tire
WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
OLMB073075
Directional tires (if equipped)
OLMB073076
7-54
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause
unusual handling characteristics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
Wheel alignment and tire balance
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
CAUTION
Tread wear indicator
OLMB073027
When replacing the tires,
recheck and tighten the wheel
nuts after driving about 1,000
km (620 miles). If the steering
wheel shakes or the vehicle
vibrates while driving, the tire is
out of balance. Align the tire
balance. If the problem is not
solved, we recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Maintenance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replacing the tire.
7
7-55
Maintenance
WARNING
Replacing tires
• Driving on worn-out tires is
very hazardous and will
reduce braking effectiveness,
steering accuracy, and traction.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and
type of tire and wheel that is
different from the one that is
originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety
and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and
serious injury. When replacing
the tires, be sure to equip all
four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type,
tread, brand and load-carrying
capacity.
(Continued)
7-56
(Continued)
• The use of any other tire size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clearance, stopping distance, body
to tire clearance, snow tire
clearance, and speedometer
reliability.
• It is best to replace all four
tires at the same time. If that
is not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a different size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) (if equipped) to work
irregularly.
Compact spare tire replacement
(if equipped)
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
Tire traction
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
WARNING
1
5,6
7
4
2
3
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
1
OLMB073028
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
7-57
Maintenance
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow
chain
clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
Tire sidewall labeling
7
Maintenance
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
7-58
(P)235/60R18 102H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
(if equipped)
235 - Tire width in millimeters.
60 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
102 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designation mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.5JX18
7.5 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
18 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.
Maximum Speed
180 km/h (112 mph)
190 km/h (118 mph)
210 km/h (130 mph)
240 km/h (149 mph)
Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
tire strength and performance,
decline with age naturally (even
unused spare tires). Therefore, the
tires (including the spare tire) should
be replaced by new ones. You can
find the manufacturing date on the
tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of
the wheel), displaying the DOT
Code. The DOT Code is a series of
numbers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the
last four digits (characters) of the
DOT code.
WARNING
Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
Warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an accident involving serious injury or
death.
Maintenance
Speed
Rating
Symbol
S
T
H
V
Z
3. Checking tire life
(TIN : Tire Identification
Number)
7
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1614 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2014.
7-59
Maintenance
4. Tire ply composition and
material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric are in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
7-60
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
because of variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
WARNING
Tire temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
Maintenance
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by the
law.
7
7-61
Maintenance
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise compare with normal tires.
7-62
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not damaged.
- If the tire is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the
tire damage with your own
eyes, have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leakage from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information on the tire sidewall.
FUSES
■ Blade type
Normal
Blown
■ Cartridge type
Normal
Blown
Normal
Normal
Blown
Blown
OLMB073029
WARNING
Fuse replacement
• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a temporary
repair. It may cause extensive
wiring damage and a possible
fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
✽ NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.
7-63
Maintenance
■ Multi fuse
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, disconnect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type, and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
7
Maintenance
CAUTION
Inner panel fuse replacement
• When replacing a blown fuse
or relay with a new one, make
sure the new fuse or relay fits
tightly into the clips. The
incomplete fastening fuse or
relay may cause the vehicle
wiring and electric systems
damage and a possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with
bolts or nuts. The fuses,
relays and terminals may be
fastened incompletely, and it
may cause a possible fire. If
fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, we recommend that
you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause
contact failure and system
malfunction.
7-64
OLMB073031
OLMB073030
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the engine compartment fuse
panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, we recommend that
you consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the cigar lighter
fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse block in
the engine compartment. If a fuse is
blown, it must be replaced.
✽ NOTICE
Memory fuse
(SHUNT connector)
• If the memory fuse is pulled up
from the fuse panel, the warning
chime, audio, clock and interior
lamps, etc., will not operate. Some
items must be reset after replacement. Refer to "Battery" in this
section.
• Even though the memory fuse is
pulled up, the battery can still be
discharged by operation of the
headlights or other electrical
devices.
Maintenance
OLMB073032
Your vehicle is equipped with a memory fuse (SHUNT connector) to prevent battery discharge if your vehicle
is parked without being operated for
prolonged periods. Use the following
procedures before parking the vehicle for prolonged periods.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail
lights.
3. Open the driver's side panel cover
and pull out the memory fuse
(SHUNT connector).
7
7-65
Maintenance
Engine compartment panel fuse
replacement
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, we recommend that you consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Main fuse
CAUTION
OLMB073033
Diesel only
OLMB073034
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by
pressing the tap and pulling up.
7-66
After checking the fuse box in
the
engine
compartment,
securely install the fuse box
cover. If not, electrical failures
may occur from water leaking
in.
OLMB073035
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽ NOTICE
✽ NOTICE
Multi fuse
If the main fuse is blown, even
though the engine compartment
panel fuse and inner fuse are not
blown, if the electrical system is not
operated, the main fuse may be
blown. The main fuse is connected
with other parts and system. We recommend that you contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
If the multi fuse is blown, we recommend that you consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
OLMB073036
Maintenance
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
2. Remove the bolts shown in the
picture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
7
7-67
Maintenance
Fuse/Relay panel description
OLMB073037
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to
the fuse box label.
7-68
OLM073302
Fuse Name
Symbol
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
POWER
CONNECTOR
AUDIO 1
10A
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
POWER
CONNECTOR
ROOM LAMP
10A
BCM, A/C Control Module, Data Link Connector, Driver/Passenger Vanity Lamp, Map
Lamp, Room Lamp, Instrument Cluster(IND), Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch, Auto
Light & Photo Sensor, Luggage Lamp, Interior Lamp Relay, A/C Control Module
MODULE 3
10A
IPS Control Module (ON Input), BCM, Head Lamp Leveling Device Switch, Head Lamp
Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror, ICM Relay Box (Rear Seat
Warmer Relay LH, Rear Seat Warmer Relay RH), Smart Key Control Module
START
10A
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 4), Burglar Alarm Relay, Transaxle Range Switch
AIR BAG
IND.
10A
Instrument Cluster (IND.)
CLUSTER
10A
Instrument Cluster, Alternator, Console Switch, BCM, Audio, Seat Belt Liminder Switch, A/C
Control Module, A/V & Navigation Head Unit
MODULE 4
10A
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 1, RLY. 11), Diesel Box (RLY. 2, RLY. 3), A/C Control Module,
Cluster Ionizer, Sunroof Motor
Maintenance
POWER
OUTLET 2
25A
Cigarette Lighter & Front Power Outlet, Rear Power Outlet
7
AUDIO 2
10A
Audio, AMP, Power Outside Mirror Switch, Smart Key Control Module, BCM, A/V &
Navigation Head Unit
AIR BAG
10A
SRS Control Module, Passenger Air Bag Lamp
MODULE 1
10A
IPS Control Module (ON/START Input), 4WD ECM, DBC Switch, Multifunction Switch,
Steering Angle Sensor, ESC Off Switch, Stop Lamp Switch (G4KD/G4KE/G4NA), Rear
Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH, Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH (CENTER)
7-69
Maintenance
Fuse Name
Symbol
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
FOG LAMP
RR
10A
ICM Relay Box (Rear Fog Lamp Relay)
WIPER
FRT
25A
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 12), Front Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch (Wiper)
S/HEATER
FRT
15A
Console Switch
POWER
OUTLET 1
15A
Cigarette Lighter & Front Power Outlet
MDPS
10A
MDPS Unit
BACK-UP LAMP
10A
Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, Electro Chromic Mirror, BCM, Audio, A/V & Navigation
Head Unit
DR LOCK
15A
Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Relay
MODULE 2
7.5A
BCM, Smart Key Control Module
WIPER RR
15A
ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay), Rear Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch (Wiper)
SUNROOF
15A
Sunroof Motor
IG 1
20A
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (FUSE - F23, F24, F25)
A/CON
7.5A
A/C Control Module
S/HEATER
RR
15A
ICM Relay Box (Rear Seat Warmer Relay LH, Rear Seat Warmer Relay RH)
7-70
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
P/WDW RH
25A
Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch, Rear Power Window Switch
RH
FOLD'G
MIRR
10A
Power Outside Mirror Switch
P/SEAT
DRV
20A
Driver Seat Manual Switch
SMART
KEY
10A
Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch, Key Solenoid
PDM
15A
Smart Key Control Module
P/WDW
LH
25A
Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch, Rear Power Window Switch
LH
AMP
25A
AMP
HTD
MIRR
7.5A
Rear Defogger Switch, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
SAFETY
P/WDW
20A
Driver Safety Power Window Module
Maintenance
Fuse Name
Symbol
MODULE 5
7.5A
ATM Shift Lever, Rear Parking Assist Buzzer
7
HAZARD
15A
ICM Relay Box (Flasher Sound Relay), BCM
7-71
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
OLMB073038
OLM073304
7-72
Relay NO.
Symbol
Relay Type
RLY. 1
Blower Relay
Plug Micro (4P)
RLY. 2
Horn Relay
Plug Micro (4P)
RLY. 3
Cooling Fan (Low) Relay
Plug Micro (4P)
RLY. 4
Start Relay
Plug Micro (4P)
RLY. 5
Burglar Alarm Horn Relay
Plug Micro (4P)
RLY. 6
Rear Defogger Relay
Plug Micro (4P)
RLY. 7
-
-
RLY. 8
-
-
RLY. 9
Cooling Fan (High) Relay
Plug Micro (4P)
RLY. 10
Deicer Relay
Plug Micro (4P)
RLY. 11
Head Lamp Relay
Plug Micro (4P)
RLY. 12
Wiper (Low) Relay
Plug Micro (4P)
RLY. 13
-
-
RLY. 14
Sub F/Pump Relay
Plug Micro (4P)
Maintenance
Relay Name
7
7-73
Maintenance
Fuse Name
MULTI
FUSE
FUSE
7-74
Symbol
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
MDPS
80A
MDPS Unit
B+1
60A
Smart Junction Box (Fuse - F13 / F20 / F26 / F31 / F37)
ABS 2
40A
ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
EMS
40A
EMS Box (Fuse - F1 / F2 / F3 / F6)
ABS 1
40A
ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
BLOWER
40A
RLY. 1 (Blower Relay)
B+3
60A
Smart Junction Box (Fuse - F29 / F30 / F35 / F36, Power Connector - F1 / F2)
B+2
60A
Smart Junction Box (Power Window Relay, Fuse - F23 / F28 / F33)
COOLING
FAN
40A(50A)
GSL(DSL)
HEATED
GLASS RR
40A
RLY. 6 (Rear Defogger Relay)
B+4
30A
Fuse - F21
IG 1
30A
W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch, With Smart Key - PDM Relay Box (IGN1 Relay)
RLY. 3 (Cooling Fan Low Relay), RLY. 9 (Cooling Fan High Relay)
Fuse Name
FUSE
Symbol
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
40A
SUB F/PUMP
20A
RLY. 14 (Sub F/Pump Relay)
HORN
15A
RLY. 2 (Horn Relay), RLY. 5 (Burglar Alarm Relay)
DEICER
15A
RLY. 10 (Deicer Relay)
STOP LAMP
10A
Stop Lamp Switch, Stop Signal Electric Module, Smart Key Control Module
AMS
10A
Battery Sensor
4WD
20A
4WD ECU
HEAD LAMP
10A
RLY. 11 (Head Lamp Relay)
ECU 2
7.5A
PCM/ECM, Clock Spring, Mass Air Flow Sensor
ABS
7.5A
ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector, Fuel
Filter Warning Sensor (D4HA), Glow Relay Unit (D4HA), Diesel Box (RLY. 4 - Fuel
Filter Heater Relay)
TCU 2
15A
Transaxle Range Switch, TCM (D4HA), Vehicle Speed Sensor, Back-Up Lamp
Switch
Maintenance
IG 2
RLY. 4 (Start Relay), W/O Smart Key - Ignition Switch, With Smart Key - PDM
Relay Box (IGN2 Relay)
7-75
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Diesel engine only)
OLMB073040
7-76
Relay NO.
Relay Name
Relay Type
RLY. 1
Engine Control Relay
Plug Mini
RLY. 2
Fuel Pump Relay
Plug Micro
RLY. 3
A/C Relay
Plug Micro
Fuse No.
Symbol
Symbol
Circuit Protected
Relay Symbol
F1
50A
PTC Heater Relay #1
Micro Plug
F2
50A
PTC Heater Relay #2
Micro Plug
F3
50A
PTC Heater Relay #3
Micro Plug
F4
30A
Fuel Filter Heater Relay
Micro Plug
F5
80A
Glow Relay Unit
-
Relay Type
Maintenance
Fuse rating
-
7
7-77
Maintenance
Circuit (EMS Box) - G4KE/G4KJ : THETA II 2.4L MPI/GDI
Fuse No.
Fuse Name
F1
ECU
30A
RLY. 1 (Engine Control Relay)
F2
TCU 1
15A
PCM
F3
A/CON
10A
RLY. 3 (A/C Relay)
F4
SENSOR 1
10A
Immobilizer Module, Crankshaft Position Sensor, Camshaft Position Sensor #1/2,
Oil Control Valve #1/2, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Manifold Valve
F5
ECU 1
20A
Ignition Coil #1/2/3/4, Condenser
F6
FUEL PUMP
15A
RLY. 2 (Fuel Pump Relay)
F7
SENSOR 4
15A
RLY. 2 (Fuel Pump Relay), E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 3 - Cooling Fan (Low)
Relay), Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down)
F8
SENSOR 3
10A
RLY. 3 (A/C Relay), Injector #1/2/3/4 (G4KE)
F9
SENSOR 2
10A
-
7-78
Symbol
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
Circuit (EMS Box) - G4NA/G4NC : NU 2.0L MPI/GDI
Fuse Name
Symbol
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
F1
ECU
30A
RLY. 1 (Engine Control Relay)
F2
TCU 1
15A
PCM/ECM
F3
A/CON
10A
RLY. 3 (A/C Relay)
F4
SENSOR 1
10A
Immobilizer Module, Camshaft Position Sensor #1/2, Oil Control Valve #1/2,
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Variable Intake Manifold Valve
F5
ECU 1
20A
Ignition Coil #1/2/3/4, Condenser
F6
FUEL PUMP
15A
RLY. 2 (Fuel Pump Relay)
F7
SENSOR 4
15A
RLY. 2 (Fuel Pump Relay), E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 3 - Cooling Fan (Low)
Relay), Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down)
F8
SENSOR 3
10A
RLY. 3 (A/C Relay), Injector #1/2/3/4 (G4NA)
F9
SENSOR 2
10A
-
Maintenance
Fuse No.
7
7-79
Maintenance
Circuit (EMS Box) - D4HA : R 2.0L
Fuse No.
Fuse Name
F1
ECU
30A
RLY. 1 (Engine Control Relay)
F2
TCU 1
15A
TCM
F3
A/CON
10A
RLY. 3 (A/C Relay)
F4
SENSOR 1
10A
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 3 - Cooling Fan (Low) Relay), EGR Cooling Bypass
Solenoid Valve, Diesel Box (RLY.1 - PTC Heager 1), Electrical VGT Actuator
F5
ECU 1
20A
ECM
F6
FUEL PUMP
15A
RLY. 2 (Fuel Pump Relay)
F7
SENSOR 4
15A
RLY. 2 (Fuel Pump Relay), Immobilizer Module, Low Pressure Regulating Valve,
Fuel Pressure Regulating Valve
F8
SENSOR 3
10A
RLY. 3 (A/C Relay), Lambda Sensor, Crankshaft Position Sensor
F9
SENSOR 2
10A
Stop Lamp Switch
7-80
Symbol
Fuse rating
Circuit Protected
LIGHT BULBS
WARNING
Working on the lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the “LOCK” position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehicle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
If you don’t have necessary
tools, the correct bulbs and the
expertise, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases,
it is difficult to replace vehicle
light bulbs because other parts
of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb.
This is especially true if you
have to remove the headlight
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlight assembly can result in
damage to the vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or washing, headlight and taillight lenses
could appear frosty. This condition
is caused by the temperature difference between the lamp inside and
outside. This is similar to the condensation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with
your vehicle. If the water leaks into
the lamp bulb circuitry, we recommend that the system be checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burnedout bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
7
7-81
Maintenance
Headlamp, position lamp,
Front turn signal lamp, front
fog lamp bulb replacement
Headlamp bulb
OLMB073042L
OLMB073041
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Front turn signal lamp
Headlamp (High/Low)
Position lamp (LED)
Front fog lamp (if equipped)
Position lamp (LED)/Daytime
running lamp (if equipped)
7-82
WARNING
Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce
flying pieces of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Never touch the glass with
bare hands. Residual oil may
cause the bulb to overheat
and burst when lit. A bulb
should be operated only when
installed in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before handling it.
6. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
7. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
8. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
✽ NOTICE
OLMB074101
We recommend that the headlight
aiming be adjusted after an accident
or after the headlight assembly is
reinstalled
at
a
authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
7-83
Maintenance
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
Turn signal lamp/Position lamp
1. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket
3. Insert a new bulb into the socket
and rotating it until it locks into
place.
4. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
7
Maintenance
Front fog lamp bulbs
(if equipped)
1. Remove the front bumper under
cover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of
the front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector
from the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on
the socket with the slots in the
housing. Push the socket into the
housing and turn the socket clockwise.
6. Connect the power connector to
the socket.
7. Reinstall the front bumper under
cover.
7-84
Side repeater lamp replacement
Type A
Type B
OLMB073046
OLMB073045
If the light bulb does not operate, we
recommend that the system be
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
1. Remove the light assembly from
the vehicle by prying the lens and
pulling the assembly out.
2. Reinstall a new light assembly to
the body of the vehicle.
Rear combination lamp bulb
replacement
Outside lamp
OLMB073048
OLMB073049
Rear turn signal lamp and stop/tail
lamp
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
7-85
Maintenance
OLMB073047
(1) Stop/tail lamp
(2) Rear turn signal lamp
(3) Back-up lamp
3. Loosen the lamp assembly retaining screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
4. Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
7. Insert a new bulb into the socket
and rotating it until it locks into
place.
8. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
7
Maintenance
Inside lamp
OLMB073051
OLMB073052
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the tailgate.
3. Remove the service cover using a
flat-blade screwdriver.
7-86
Tail lamp/Back-up lamp
(Bulb type)
4.Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5.Tail light : Remove the bulb from
the socket by pressing it in and
rotating it counterclockwise until
the tabs on the bulb align with the
slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out
of the socket.
Back-up light : Remove the bulb
from the socket by pulling it out.
6.Insert a new bulb into the socket.
7.Install the socket into the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots on the assembly and
turning the socket clockwise.
✽ NOTICE
If the LED type lamp does not operate, we recommend that you
checked an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Rear fog lamp
1. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
3. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
High mounted stop lamp
replacement
OLMB073103
1.Open the tailgate.
2.Gently remove the center cover of
the rear tailgate trim.
3.Disconnect the electrical connector.
4.Loosen the retaining nuts and
remove the spoiler.
5.Remove the high mounted stop
lamp assembly (A) after loosening
the nuts and washer nozzle (B).
6.Reinstall a new lamp assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
License plate lamp bulb
replacement
OLMB073104
(A)
(B)
OLMB073105
7-87
Maintenance
OLMB073054
1. Loosen the lens retaining screws
with a philips head screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with the
lens retaining screws.
7
Maintenance
■ Map lamp
■ Sunvisor lamp
Interior lamp bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interior lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
WARNING
■ Room lamp
■ Glove box lamp (if equipped)
Prior to working on the Interior
lamps, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
lamp housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
■ Luggage room lamp (if equipped)
OLMB073057/OLMB073059
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
OLMB073055/OLMB073056/OLMB073058
7-88
APPEARANCE CARE
Finish maintenance
Washing
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits.
A mild soap, safe for use on painted
surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap,
chemical detergents or hot
water, and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight or
when the body of the vehicle
is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through
the windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the
plastic parts and lamps, do
not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Maintenance
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
7
7-89
Maintenance
WARNING
Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
OLMB073082
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
7-90
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster. Removing oil, tar, and
similar materials with a spot remover
will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas
even if the rest of the vehicle does
not yet need waxing.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may
result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.
Bright-metal maintenance
Underbody maintenance
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of brightmetal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rusting.
✽ NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body shop
applies anti-corrosion materials to
the parts repaired or replaced.
7-91
Maintenance
Finish damage repair
7
Maintenance
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
7-92
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
They may scratch or damage the
finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergent. It may damage and corrode the aluminum wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produces cars of the
highest quality. However, this is only
part of the job. To achieve the longterm corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the car.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car
is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
getting started by observing the following:
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your car clean and free of
corrosive materials. Attention to the
underside of the car is particularly
important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your car at least once
a month and be sure to clean the
underside thoroughly when winter
is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the
components under the fenders and
other areas that are hidden from
view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather
than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent
it. Water under high pressure and
steam are particularly effective in
removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
7-93
Maintenance
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in contact with the car surfaces by moisture
that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it is slow to dry and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to
keep your car clean and free of mud
or accumulations of other materials.
This applies not only to the visible
surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
7
Maintenance
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are
kept open so that moisture can
escape and not be trapped inside
to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a
favorable environment for corrosion.
This is particularly true if you wash
your car in the garage or drive it into
the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a
heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so
moisture is dispersed.
7-94
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions that follow for
the proper way to clean vinyl.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped
off.
Cleaning the upholstery and
interior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not properly maintained.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric’s
appearance and fire-resistant
properties.
7-95
Maintenance
Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic
components inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
CAUTION
7
Maintenance
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
7-96
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the Service
Passport in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems which are as follows.
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
car inspected and maintained by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance with the maintenance
schedule in this manual.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
7-97
Maintenance
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
7
Maintenance
3. Exhaust emission control
system
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle performance.
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
7-98
WARNING
Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
following to avoid CO poisoning.
• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)
WARNING
Fire
• A hot exhaust system can
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
Maintenance
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle. Do not park,
idle, or drive the vehicle over
or near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, paper,
leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic system are very hot
while the engine is running or
immediately after the engine
is turned off. Keep away from
the exhaust system and catalytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engine.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with a very low fuel
level. If you run out of gasoline, it
could cause the engine to misfire
and result in excessive loading of
the catalytic converter.
7
7-99
Maintenance
Diesel Particulate Filter
(if equipped)
The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
system removes the soot emitted
from the vehicle.
Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF
system automatically burns (oxidizes) and removes the accumulated
soot according to the driving condition. In other words, the active burning by engine control system and
high exhaust gas temperature
caused by normal/high driving condition burns and removes the accumulated soot.
However, if the vehicle continues to
be driven at low speed for long time,
the accumulated soot may not be
automatically removed because of
low exhaust gas temperature. In this
particular case, the amount of soot is
out of detection limit, the soot oxidation process by engine control system may not happen and the malfunction indicator light may blink.
7-100
When the malfunction indicator light
blinks, it may stop blinking by driving
the vehicle at more than 60km/h (37
mph) or at more than second gear
with 1500 ~ 2000 engine rpm for a
certain time (for about 25 minutes).
If the malfunction indicator light continues to be blinked in spite of the
procedure, please visit an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and then check the
DPF system.
If you continue to drive with the malfunction indicator light blinking for a
long time, the DPF system can be
damaged and fuel consumption can
be worsen.
CAUTION
Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the
regulated automotive diesel
fuel for diesel vehicle equipped
with the DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including
high sulfur (more than 50 ppm
sulfur) and unspecified additives, it can cause the DPF system to be damaged and white
smoke can be emitted.
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended SAE viscosity number ..........................8-8
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) .........8-9
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL..........................8-9
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND PRESSURE LABEL..8-10
ENGINE NUMBER .................................................8-10
AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR LABEL.........8-11
REFRIGERANT LABEL..........................................8-11
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY.......................8-11
Specifications & Consumer information
DIMENSIONS ...........................................................8-2
ENGINE ....................................................................8-2
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ................................8-2
BULB WATTAGE......................................................8-3
TIRES AND WHEELS ..............................................8-4
LOAD AND SPEED CAPACITY TIRES ...................8-4
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT......................................8-5
LUGGAGE VOLUME................................................8-5
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS
AND CAPACITIES ....................................................8-6
8
Specifications & Consumer information
DIMENSIONS
Item
mm (in)
Overall length
4,410 (173.6)
Overall width
Overall height
1,820 (71.6)
For Europe
1,650 (64.9)/1,680 (66.1)*
Except Europe
1,655 (65.2)/1,685 (66.3)*
Front tread
1,585 (62.4)
Rear tread
1,586 (62.4)
Wheelbase
2,640 (103.9)
* with roof rack
ENGINE
Item
Displacement
cc (cu. in)
Bore x Stroke
mm (in.)
Gasoline Nu 2.0
Gasoline theta II 2.4
Diesel R2.0
1,999 (121.98)
2,359 (143.95)
1,995 (121.74)
81x97 (3.18X3.81)
88x97 (3.46X3.81)
84x90 (3.30X3.54)
Firing order
1-3-4-2
1-3-4-2
1-3-4-2
No. of cylinders
4. In-line
4. In-line
4. In-line
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Item
Refrigerant
Compressor lubricant
8-2
Weight of volume
Classification
550±25g
R-134a
120±10cm
3
PAG oil
BULB WATTAGE
Front
Interior
Wattage
Bulb type
55 or 35(HID)
HIR2LL or D3S
21
LED
35
LED
LED
21
21 or 5, LED
8
LED
21
16
LED
5
10
8
5
5
5
5
PY21W
LED
H8
LED
LED
P21W
P21 or W5W, LED
W8W
LED
PY21W
W16W
LED
W5W
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON
Specifications & Consumer information
Rear
Light Bulb
Headlights(Low)
Headlights(High)
Front turn signal lamps
Front position lights
Front fog lights *
Side Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror)
Daytime running lights *
Rear fog lights *
Rear Stop/Tail lights (outside)
Rear tail lights (Inside)
Rear Stop/Tail lights (Inside)
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
High mounted stop light
License plate lights
Map lamps
Room lamps
Vanity mirror lamps
Glove box lamp
Door courtesy lamps
Luggage lamp
8
* If equipped
8-3
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
Inflation pressure bar (psi, kPa)
Item
Tire size
Wheel size
Full size tire
225/55R18
225/60R17
6.5J×18
6.5J×17
Compact spare tire
(if equipped)
T155/90D16
4.0T×16
Normal load
Maximum load
(
)
(
Front
2.3
(33,230)
Rear
2.3
(33,230)
Front
2.3
(33,230)
Rear
2.3
(33,230)
4.2
(60,420)
4.2
(60,420)
4.2
(60,420)
4.2
(60,420)
Wheel lug nut torque
kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)
)
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
LOAD AND SPEED CAPACITY TIRES
Item
Tire size
Wheel size
Full size tire
225/55R18
225/60R17
6.5J×18
6.5J×17
Load Capacity
LI *1
kg
99
775
98
750
Compact spare tire
(if equipped)
T155/90D16
4.0T×16
110
*1 LI : LOAD INDEX
*2 SS : SPEED SYMBOL
8-4
1,060
Speed Capacity
SS *2
km/h
H
210
H
210
M
130
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
Except Europe and Middle East
Kg (lbs)
Nu 2.0
Item
2WD
1,980 (4365)
5 seater
4WD
2,030 (4475)
Theta 2.4
2WD
2,000 (4409)
4WD
2,050 (4519)
R 2.0
2WD
2,090 (4607)
4WD
2,140 (4717)
Specifications & Consumer information
For Middle East
Kg (lbs)
Item
5 seater
Nu 2.0
2WD
1,980 (4365)
4WD
2,030 (4475)
Theta 2.4
2WD
-
4WD
2,050 (4519)
R 2.0
2WD
2,090 (4607)
4WD
2,140 (4717)
For Europe
Kg (lbs)
Item
5 seater
Nu 2.0
2WD
4WD
1,980 (4365)
2,030 (4475)
Theta 2.4
2WD
-
4WD
2,050 (4519)
R 2.0
2WD
4WD
2,090 (4607)
2,140 (4717)
LUGGAGE VOLUME
ltem
VDA
MIN.
MAX.
8
5 Seater
465 l (16.42 cu.ft)
1,436 l (50.71 cu.ft)
Min : Behind rear seat to upper edge of the seat back.
Max : Behind front seat to roof.
8-5
Specifications & Consumer information
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant
Engine oil * *
(drain and refill)
1
2
Recommends
❈ Check the engine oil level
gauge.
Engine oil consumption
Manual transaxle fluid
Gasoline
Engine
8-6
API Service SM *5, ILSAC GF-4 or above
ACEA A5 (or above)
4.0 l (4.22 US qt.)
with DPF *6
7.6 l (8.03 US qt.)
ACEA C2 (C3)
without DPF *6
7.6 l (8.03 US qt.)
ACEA B4
Normal driving condition
MAX. 1L / 1,500 km
-
Severe driving condition
MAX. 1L / 1,000 km
-
Diesel
Engine
Gasoline
Engine
Gasoline
Engine
Diesel
Engine
Power steering fluid
Classification
Nu 2.0
Diesel
Engine
Automatic transaxle fluid
Theta II 2.4
Volume
4.6 l (4.86 US qt.) *3
4.8 l (5.07 US qt.) *4
2.4L
1.9 ~ 2.0 l
(2.00 ~2.10 US qt.)
1.8 ~ 1.9 l
(1.90 ~2.00 US qt.)
1.8 ~ 1.9 l
(1.90 ~2.00 US qt.)
7.1 l (7.50 US qt.)
2.0L
7.1 l (7.50 US qt.)
R2.0L
7.8 l (8.24 US qt.)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV,
SK ATF SP-IV,
NOCA ATF SP-IV,
HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV
1.0 l (1.06 US qt.)
PSF-4
2.0L 2WD
2.0L 4WD
R2.0L
API GL-4, SAE 75W/85
Lubricant
Coolant
Gasoline
Engine
Diesel
Engine
Rear differential oil (4WD)
Transfer case oil (4WD)
Fuel
2.0L
R2.0L
9.1 ~ 9.3 l
(9.61 ~ 9.82 US qt.)
0.7~0.8 l
(0.74~0.85 US qt.)
0.53 l (0.56 US qt.)
0.6 l (0.63US qt.)
Classification
Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for
aluminum radiator)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL SPIRAX X or equivalent)
58 l (15.32 US gal.) Refer to “Fuel requirements” in foreword section
*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 Yellow engine oil dipstick (if equipped)
*4 Red engine oil dipstick (if equipped)
*5 If the API service SM or ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL or ACEA A3.
*6 Diesel Particulate Filter
8-7
Specifications & Consumer information
Brake/clutch fluid
2.4L
Volume
7.1 ~ 7.4 l
(7.50 ~ 7.51 US qt.)
6.7 l (7.08 US qt.)
8
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain
plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in
dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the
engine and other mechanisms
that could be damaged.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather.
Using oils of any viscosity other than
those recommended could result in
engine damage. When choosing an
oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in
before the next oil change. Proceed
to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
Temperature
(°F)
-10
0
20
40
60
80
100
Gasoline
Engine Oil
(2.0L MPI,
2.4L MPI)
20W-50
15W-40
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
15W-40
10W-30/40
Diesel Engine Oil
5W-30/40
0W-30/40
8-8
50
120
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
Frame number
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
VIN label (if equipped)
■ Type A
OLMB083001
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the passenger seat. To check
the number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
OLMB083002
■ Type B
OLMB083003
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side center pillar gives the
vehicle identification number (VIN).
8-9
Specifications & Consumer information
OLMB083007
8
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER
■ Gasoline engine (2.0L)
■ Diesel engine
OLMB083014
OLMB083004
■ Gasoline engine (2.4L)
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
OLMB083015
8-10
OLMB083016
AIR CONDITIONER
COMPRESSOR LABEL
REFRIGERANT LABEL
DECLARATION OF
CONFORMITY
■ Example
OLMB083008
A compressor label informs you the
type of compressor your vehicle is
equipped with such as model, supplier part number, production number,
refrigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2).
The refrigerant label is located at the
front of the engine room.
CE0678
The radio frequency components of
the vehicle comply with requirements
and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1995/5/EC.
Further information including the
manufacturer's declaration of conformity is available on HYUNDAI
web site as follows;
http://service.hyundai-motor.com
8-11
Specifications & Consumer information
OLMB073087
8